GRT100C 6F2S0844-1.1

6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
TRANSFORMER PROTECTION RELAY
GRT100 - C
© Toshiba Energy Systems & Solutions Corporation 2017

All Rights Reserved.
( Ver. 1.1 )
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Safety Precautions
Before using this product, be sure to read this chapter carefully.
This chapter describes safety precautions when using the GRT100. Before installing and using the
equipment, read and understand this chapter thoroughly.
Explanation of symbols used

Signal words such as DANGER, WARNING, and two kinds of CAUTION, will be followed by
important safety information that must be carefully reviewed.
DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or

serious injury if you do not follow instructions.
WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in death or

serious injury if you do not follow instructions.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in
minor injury or moderate injury.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in
property damage.
 1 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
DANGER
 Current transformer circuit
Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be
opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a dangerous high
voltage.
WARNING
 Exposed terminals
Do not touch the terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage generated
is dangerous.
 Residual voltage
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply.
It takes about 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
 Fiber optic
Do not view directly with optical instruments.
CAUTION
 Earth
Earth the earthing terminal of the equipment securely.
CAUTION
 Operation conditions
Use the equipment within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and dust as detailed in the
specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.
 Ratings
Before applying AC voltage and current or DC power supply to the equipment, check that they
conform to the equipment ratings.
 Printed circuit board
Do not attach and remove the printed circuit board while the DC power to the equipment is on, as
this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
 External circuit
When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check the
supply voltage used and prevent the connected circuit from overheating.
 Connection cable
Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.
 Modification
Do not modify this equipment, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction, and any such
modifications will invalidate the warranty.
 Short-link
Do not remove a short-link which is mounted at the terminal block on the rear of the relay before
 2 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
shipment, as this may cause the performance of this equipment such as withstand voltage, etc., to
reduce.
 Disposal
When disposing of this product, do so in a safe manner according to local regulations.
This product contains a lithium-ion battery, which should be removed at the end-of-life of the
product. The battery must be recycled or disposed of in accordance with local regulations. The
battery can be removed by withdrawing the Signal Processing module (SPM) from the relay case,
and cutting the connecting leads and plastic strap which hold the battery.
 Plastics material
This product contains the following plastics material.
- ABS, Polycarbonate, Acrylic resins
 3 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Contents
Safety Precautions 1
1. Introduction 8
2. Application Notes 9
2.1 Application 9
2.2 Protection Scheme 10
2.3 Current Differential Protection 12
2.3.1 Differential Scheme 12
2.3.2 Stability for CT Saturation during Through-fault Conditions 15
2.3.3 Matching of CT Secondary Currents 17
2.3.4 Connection between CT Secondary Circuit and the GRT100 20
2.3.5 Setting 21
2.4 Restricted Earth Fault Protection 29
2.5 Overcurrent Protection 33
2.6 Thermal Overload Protection 38
2.7 Frequency Protection 39
2.8 Overexcitation Protection 41
2.9 Trip by External Devices 43
2.10 Tripping Output 44
2.11 Characteristics of Measuring Elements 46
2.11.1 Percentage Current Differential Element DIF 46
2.11.2 High-set Overcurrent Element HOC 47
2.11.3 Restricted Earth Fault Element REF 47
2.11.4 Inverse Time Overcurrent Element OCI and EFI 49
2.11.5 Definite Time Overcurrent element OC and EF 50
2.11.6 Thermal Overload Element THR 50
2.11.7 Frequency Element FRQ 52
2.11.8 Overexcitation Element V/F 52
3. Technical Description 53
3.1 Hardware Description 53
3.1.1 Outline of Hardware Modules 53
3.1.2 Transformer Module 56
3.1.3 Signal Processing Module 57
3.1.4 Binary Input and Output Module 58
3.1.5 Human Machine Interface (HMI) Module 62
3.2 Input and Output Signals 64
3.2.1 Input Signals 64
3.2.2 Binary Output Signals 65
3.2.3 PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Function 66
3.3 Automatic Supervision 67
3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision 67
 4 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
3.3.2 Relay Monitoring and Testing 67

3.3.3 Failure Alarms 68
3.3.4 Trip Blocking 68
3.3.5 Setting 69
3.4 Recording Function 70
3.4.1 Fault Recording 70
3.4.2 Event Recording 71
3.4.3 Disturbance Recording 72
3.5 Metering Function 74
4. User Interface 75
4.1 Outline of User Interface 75
4.1.1 Front Panel 75
4.1.2 Communication Ports 77
4.2 Operation of the User Interface 78
4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays 78
4.2.2 Relay Menu 80
4.2.3 Displaying Records 83
4.2.4 Displaying the Status 86
4.2.5 Viewing the Settings 91
4.2.6 Changing the Settings 91
4.2.7 Testing 107
4.3 Personal Computer Interface 111
4.4 Relay Setting and Monitoring System 111
4.5 IEC 60870-5-103 Interface 112
4.6 Clock Function 112
5. Installation 113
5.1 Receipt of Relays 113
5.2 Relay Mounting 113
5.3 Electrostatic Discharge 113
5.4 Handling Precautions 113
5.5 External Connections 114
6. Commissioning and Maintenance 115
6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests 115
6.2 Cautions 116
6.2.1 Safety Precautions 116
6.2.2 Cautions on Tests 116
6.3 Preparations 117
6.4 Hardware Tests 118
6.4.1 User Interfaces 118
6.4.2 Binary Input Circuit 119
6.4.3 Binary Output Circuit 120
6.4.4 AC Input Circuits 121
6.5 Function Test 122
 5 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
6.5.1 Measuring Element 122

6.5.2 Timer Test 138
6.5.3 Protection Scheme 140
6.5.4 Metering and Recording 140
6.6 Conjunctive Tests 141
6.6.1 On Load Test 141
6.6.2 Tripping Circuit Test 141
6.7 Maintenance 143
6.7.1 Regular Testing 143
6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair 143
6.7.3 Replacing Failed Modules 145
6.7.4 Resumption of Service 147
6.7.5 Storage 147
7. Putting Relay into Service 148
 6 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Appendix A Block Diagram 149

Appendix B Signal List 151
Appendix C Variable Timer List 169
Appendix D Binary Output Default Setting List 171
Appendix E Details of Relay Menu and LCD & Button Operation 175
Appendix F Case Outline 183
Appendix G External Connections 189
Appendix H Relay Setting Sheet 197
Appendix I Commissioning Test Sheet (sample) 229
Appendix J Return Repair Form 235
Appendix K Technical Data 241
Appendix L Setting of REF Element 249
Appendix M Symbols Used in Scheme Logic 255
Appendix N Implementation of Thermal Model to IEC60255-8 259
Appendix O IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability and Troublehsooting 263
Appendix P Inverse Time Characteristics 275
Appendix Q Failed Module Tracing and Replacement 279
Appendix R Ordering 285
 The data given in this manual are subject to change without notice. (Ver.1.1)
 7 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
1. Introduction
GRT100 provides transformer protection for two- or three- winding power transformers
connected to single, double or a one-and-a-half busbar system.
GRT100 is member of the G-series numerical relays which are built on common hardware
modules and featured with the following functions:
 Human interfaces on the relay front panel, and local and remote PCs
4  40 character LCD and keypad
RS232C and RS485 communication ports
 Meeting and recording of event, fault and disturbance
 IRIG-B time synchronization
 Automatic supervision
 User configurable I/O and programmable logic by PLC (Programmable Logic Controller)
GRT100 has three model series which differ according to the number of three-phase current
inputs for differential protection as follows:
Relay Type and Model

Relay Type:
- Type GRT100; Numerical transformer protection relay
Relay Model:
- Model 100 series; 2 three-phase current inputs, applied to two-winding transformers
 Model 101; 16 binary inputs, 13 binary outputs, 5 binary outputs for tripping
 Model 103; 15 binary inputs (12-independent), 13 binary outputs, 3 binary outputs for tripping
- Model 200 series; 3 three-phase current inputs, applied to two- and three-winding transformers
Model 100 series have 2 three-phase current inputs and can be applied to two-winding
transformers. Model 200 series have 3 three-phase current inputs and can be applied to two- and
three-winding transformers.
 8 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
2. Application Notes
2.1 Application
GRT100 provides high-speed transformer and reactor protection, and realises high dependability
and security for diverse faults such as single-phase faults, multi-phase faults, overload and
over-excitation.
GRT100 is used as a main protection and backup protection of the following transformers and
reactors.
 Two-winding or three-winding power transformers
 Auto-transformers
 Generator-transformer units
 Shunt reactors
GRT100 is designed to provide stability under magnetizing inrush and overexcitation conditions.
GRT100 provides the following metering and recording functions.
 Metering
 Fault records
 Event records
 Disturbance records
GRT100 provides the following human interfaces for relay setting or viewing of stored data.
 Relay front panel: LCD, LED display and operation keys
 Local PC
 Remote PC
Password protection is provided to change settings. Eight active setting groups are provided. This
allows the user to set one group for normal operating conditions while other groups may be set to
cover alternative operating conditions by binary input using the PLC.
GRT100 provides either two or three serial ports, and an IRIG-B port for an external clock
connection. A local PC can be connected via the RS232C port on the front panel of the relay.
Either one or two rear ports (RS485 or fibre optic) are provided for connection to a remote PC and
for IEC60870-5-103 communication with a substation control and automation system.
Further, the GRT100 provides the following functions.

- Configurable binary inputs and outputs
- Programmable logic for I/O configuration, alarms, indications, recording, etc.
- Automatic supervision
 9 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
2.2 Protection Scheme

GRT100 provides the following protection schemes with measuring elements in parentheses.
Appendix A shows block diagrams of the GRT100 series.
 Current differential protection (DIFT)
 Restricted earth fault protection (1REF-3REF)
 Time-overcurrent protection (1OC-3OC, 1OCI-3OCI, 1EF-3EF and 1EFI-3EFI)
 Thermal overload protection (THR)
 Frequency protection (FRQ)
 Overexcitation protection (V/F)
 Trip and/or indication of external devices (Buchholtz relay, pressure or temperature sensing
devices etc.)
The DIFT, provided with DIF and HOC elements, and the REF are applied for main protection.
For details, see Sections 2.3, 2.4 and 2.11.
They provide transformer protection coverage as follows:
REF: protection for winding to earth faults of star-winding side
DIF: protection for all internal transformer faults (The DIF can be blocked by 2F or 5F
element.)
HOC: protection for all internal transformer faults, specifically for heavy internal faults,
high-speed operation (The HOC is not blocked by 2F or 5F element. The sensitivity is
set above the estimated maximum inrush current.)
DIF
HOC
REF
For earth fault only
Small Differential current Large
The number of measuring elements for the restricted earth fault protection and time-overcurrent
protection is dependent on the relay models.
Figure 2.2.1, 2.2.2 and 2.2.3 show typical application and the relationship between AC inputs and
the measuring elements applied in each model.
 10 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
GRT100
1OC/1OCI THR
1CT
VT
FRQ V/F
HV Calculate 3I0
1nCT
1EF/1EFI 1REF
LV
DIFT
2nCT
2CT
2OC/2OCI
Calculate 3I0
2EF/2EFI 2REF
Figure 2.2.1 Measuring Elements of Model 100 series
GRT100
1CT
1OC/1OCI THR
VT
HV FRQ V/F Calculate 3I0
1REF
1nCT
LV 1EF/1EFI
MV 3nCT
3CT DIFT
2nCT
2OC/2OCI
2CT
Calculate 3I0
2EF/2EFI 2REF
3OC/3OCI
Calculate 3I0
3EF/3EFI 3REF
GRT100
1OC/1OCI
1CT
2OC/2OCI
2CT
VT Calculate 3I0
FRQ V/F
HV Calculate 3I0
1nCT
1EF/1EFI 1REF
LV DIFT
3CT
3OC/3OCI
 11 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
2.3 Current Differential Protection

2.3.1 Differential Scheme
Current differential protection DIFT provides an overall transformer protection deriving phase
current from each transformer winding, calculating the differential current on a per phase basis
and detecting phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth faults.
The current differential protection is based on Kirchhoff’s first law that the vector summation of
all currents flowing into a protected zone must be zero. Figure 2.3.1.1 shows the principle of
current differential protection. Differential current (id) is the vector summation of all terminal
current of the transformer. The differential current (id=i1+i2) is zero because the current (i1)
equals current (i2) during a load condition or an external fault. During an internal fault, the
differential current (id) is not zero because the current (i1) does not equal to the current (i2), and
the DIFT operates.
Primary Secondary
I1 I2
Transformer
i1 i2
id=i1+i2
Differential current
detection DIFT
Figure 2.3.1.1 Current Differential Protection
Scheme logic
Figure 2.3.1.2 shows the scheme logic of the current differential protection. Current differential
element DIFT comprises sub-elements HOC, DIF, 2F and 5F which operate for differential
current on a per phase basis.
Note: For the symbols used in the scheme logic, see Appendix M.
HOC is a high-set overcurrent element operating for differential current. It provides high-speed
protection for heavy internal faults.
DIF is a percentage restraining element and has dual restraining characteristics, a weak restraint
in the small current region and a strong restraint in the large current region, to cope with erroneous
differential current which may be caused due to output imbalance of the CTs in case of an external
fault. (For the characteristics, see Section 2.11.)
The DIF output signal can be blocked when the 2F or 5F elements detect second harmonic inrush
current during transformer energization or fifth harmonic components during transformer
overexcitation. Blocking is enabled by setting scheme switch [2F-LOCK] or [5F-LOCK] to
“ON”. The following two blocking schemes are selectable by scheme switch [DIFTPMD].
“3POR”: When any one phase of the 2F or 5F elements operate, tripping by the DIF
element is blocked in all 3 phases. “3POR” is recommended for transformers
with large capacity whose second harmonic component may be low. Its blocking
function is stronger than that of the “1P” below.
“1P”: When any phase of the 2F or 5F elements operate, only the corresponding phase
output of the DIF element is blocked.
Protection by DIF and HOC can perform instantaneous three-phase tripping of up to five breakers.
 12 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Any of the five breaker tripping signals DIFT-1 to DIFT-5 are enabled or disabled by the scheme
switch [DIF1] to [DIF5] settings.
Note: Models 103, 203 and 204 are not provided with DIFT-4 and DIFT-5, and perform tripping of up
to three breakers.
DIFT
HOC-A 41
TRIP
224
42 & DIFT-1
HOC-B 1 1 DIF1
+
43
HOC-C
121
& DIFT-2
DIF2
44 +
DIF-A & &
& & 1 1
45 & DIFT-3
DIF-B & DIF3
& & & +
46
DIF-C & & &
& & DIFT-4
DIF4
95 +
2F-A & 1 1 & 1
96 & DIFT-5
2F-B & 1 1 & DIF5
+
97
2F-C & 1 1 &
DIFTPMD 3POR
98 1P
5F-A & +
99
5F-B &
5F-C 100
&
122
2F-Lock 1 1 &
+
123
5F-Lock 1 1
+
1616 DIF-A_BLOCK 1
1617 DIF-B_BLOCK 1
1618 DIF-C_BLOCK 1 Note: Models 103, 203 and 204 are not provided with DIFT-4 and DIFT-5.
Figure 2.3.1.2 Scheme Logic of Current Differential Protection
Display mode following differential tripping

Following a trip output, GRT100 can display either the operating phase or the faulted phase
according to the user’s requirements as shown in Table 2.3.1.1. The operating phase or faulted
phase display is selectable by a setting in the Record menu.
Table 2.3.1.1 Operating Phase / Faulted Phase Display
Operating phase display Faulted phase display

Setting 1 = Operating 2 = Fault
(Setting/Record/Fault
record/Phase mode)
Displayed phase Operating phase Faulted phase (for single-phase to earth, phase
to phase, two-phase to earth and three-phase to
Generally, the operating phase of the DIF
earth faults)
element does not correspond with the faulted
phase, but depends on the transformer
configuration and the electrical quantities that
are input to the GRT100 current differential
calculation.
 13 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Application All two- and three-winding transformers  Faults at primary side or secondary side of Yy0
and Yy6 transformers
 Faults at primary side of Yd1, Yd3, Yd5, Yd7,
Yd9, Yd11, Yy2, Yy4, Yy8 and Yy10
transformers
 Faults at secondary side of Dy1, Dy3, Dy5,
Dy7, Dy9 and Dy11 transformers
 Faults on Dd2, Dd4, Dd6, Dd8 and Dd10
transformers, faults at Zig-zag connected side
of transformers and faults at tertiary side of
three-winding transformers are not
supported.
Logic Refer to Figure 2.3.1.4. Refer to Figure 2.3.1.4.
 Phase (A/B/C) display is based on the  Phase (A/B/C) display is based on the
operating signal of DIF or HOC element, and operating signal of DIF or HOC element and a
“N” display is based on the operating signal of differential current value, and “N” display is
REF element. If the REF is not used, “N” is not based on the operating signal of REF element. If
displayed. the REF is not used, “N” is not displayed.
DIFT
[Operating phase]
41
HOC-A 1 Phase A
42
HOC-B Phase B
1
43 Phase C
HOC-C
121 1
DIF
44 &
DIF-A Phase N
&
45 &
DIF-B
&
46 &
DIF-C
& Faulted phase
selection logic
95 1REF
2F-A & 1 1 & 1
1
96 1REF1
2F-B & 1 1 +
97 1REF5
2F-C & 1 1 +
[Faulted phase]
98 2REF &
5F-A &
1
99 2REF1
5F-B & +
5F-C 100 2REF5

&
+
3REF
2F-Lock &
+ 1
3REF1
5F-Lock +
+ Note: Models 103, 203 and 204 are not provided with 1REF-4,
3REF5
1REF-5, 2REF-4, 2REF-5, 3REF-4 and 3REF-5.
+
Figure 2.3.1.4 Operating Phase and Faulted Phase Selection Logic
 14 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
2.3.2 Stability for CT Saturation during Through-fault Conditions
For current differential protection of transformers, GRT100 has a strong restraint characteristic in
the large current region for erroneous differential current due to CT saturation. Further, GRT100
provides a CT saturation countermeasure function. If any CTs saturate due to a large through-fault
current, an apparent differential current is generated in the differential circuit and may cause false
operation of the differential protection.
Operation Principle
Even when a CT saturates under very large primary currents, the waveform of the saturated CT
secondary current has two identifiable periods in each cycle: a non-saturated period and a
saturated period. The GRT100 utilizes this phenomenon and provides very secure operation for
external faults with a large through-fault current.
Figure 2.3.2.1 shows a block diagram of the CT saturation countermeasure (CTS). The CTS has a
waveform discriminating element (WDE) and starting element (SE). WDE operates if the change
in the instantaneous value of the differential current is less than a specified percentage of the
change in the instantaneous value of the restraining current. In the CTs non-saturated period, the
differential current is theoretically zero for through-fault currents. The element operates in this
period.
Current
Input Differential Element
(DIFT_DIF) [CTSEN] & Tripping
Output
ON
Waveform Discriminating
Element 0 t
&
Starting Element
CTS
Figure 2.3.2.1 Differential Element with CT Saturation Countermeasure
The algorithm of this element is given by the following equation:

ΔId < 0.15×(ΔIp + ΔIn)
where,
ΔId : Change in the differential current Id
(ΔIp + ΔIn) : Change in the restraining current in the positive and negative cycles
Id : Differential current
Ip : Sum of positive input currents
In : Sum of negative input currents
SE operates when the sum of the absolute values of the difference between the instantaneous
values of current data at each current input from one cycle is greater than 0.5  (CT secondary
rated current).
SE discriminates between healthy and faulty power system conditions and blocks the output of
WDE which may otherwise operate during healthy conditions.
Figure 2.3.2.2 shows CT secondary current waveforms of the incoming and outgoing terminals,
 15 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
and also the differential current at the time of an external fault with outgoing terminal CT
saturation.
Incoming terminal
current
Outgoing terminal
current
Differential
current
No change period
Figure 2.3.2.2 CT Secondary Current Waveforms and Differential Current for an External
Fault with CT Saturation
From the inception of the fault until the CT secondary current at the outgoing terminal saturates,
the differential current Id is zero and the change in the differential current ΔId obtained from
equation (2) is also zero. However, the change in the restraining current given by equation (3) is a
sufficiently large positive value, so equation (1) is met and WDE operates.
SE detects changes in the terminal currents and rapidly operates, producing an AND output with
WDE. After this, since there is a period during which equation (1) is not satisfied, a certain time
delay is inserted to reliably block the operation of the DIFT_DIF differential element.
If, during an internal fault, there is a period during which the change in the instantaneous value of
the differential current is small due to CT saturation, WDE will not operate because the change in
the restraining current is also small during that period. Thus, during an internal fault, operation of
the differential element is not blocked falsely.
The CTS function can be disabled by the scheme switch [CTSEN].
 16 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
2.3.3 Matching of CT Secondary Currents
The currents supplied to the differential elements must be matched in phase and amplitude under
through-load and through-fault conditions.
Generally, it is difficult to completely match the incoming current with the outgoing current for
the relay input because the CT ratios at the primary, secondary and tertiary sides of a transformer
are not matched in terms of the CT ratio, phase angle and cancelling of zero-sequence current.
Therefore, the relay is required to provide a matching function.
GRT100 provides the following matching method:
Primary Secondary
I1 I2
CT ratio: N1 CT ratio: N2
Transformer
I1/N1=i1 I2/N2=i2
GRT100
Matching of phase Matching of phase
angle / Zero-sequence angle / Zero-sequence
current elimination current elimination
Matching of CT ratio Matching of CT ratio
Kct1i1 Kct2i2
Differential relay calculation
Figure 2.3.3.1 Matching Method
2.3.3.1 Matching of Phase Angle

It is necessary to compensate for the phase angle difference between the line currents on each side
of the transformer.
GRT100 can compensate for the phase angle difference by setting and does not require CT
secondary circuit arrangements such as delta-connection on the star-connected side of the power
transformer, which was common in earlier transformer protections.
Phase angle matching is performed by setting according to the hands of a clock and the
transformer connections described in IEC60076-1. For details of the setting, refer to 2.3.5.
2.3.3.2 Zero-sequence current elimination

In addition to compensating for the phase angle between the primary and secondary currents of
the transforemer, also phase angle matching prevents unnecessary operation due to zero-sequence
current during an external earth fault, such as in the following cases.
Case 1:
When an external fault occurs at the star-connected side of the transformer shown in Figure
2.3.3.2, a zero-sequence current flows in star-connected side, but the zero-sequence current at the
delta-side circulates in the delta winding. The zero-sequence current is only fed into the star
winding side of the DIFT which is star-connected at the CT secondary, thus causing the DIFT to
operate incorrectly. Since the DIFT provides a function to eliminate the zero-sequence current by
software, the DIFT is insensitive the fault described.
 17 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
I0 Transformer Ia
I0
Ib
I0
I0
I0 Ic
I0
3I0
DIFT
Figure 2.3.3.2 External Earth Fault at the Star-connected side of a Transformer
Case 2:
When the delta winding of a power transformer is earthed through an earthing transformer as
shown in Figure 2.3.3.3 and the earthing transformer is located within the differential protection
zone, the DIFT may operate incorrectly in case of an external earth fault because the
zero-sequence current flows only on the delta side of the power transformer and appears as a
differential current. Since the DIFT provides a function to eliminate the zero-sequence current by
software, the DIFT is insensitive to the fault described.
Ia
I0
Ib
I0
Ic
I0
Earthing
Transformer
3I0
DIFT
Figure 2.3.3.3 External Earth Fault at the Delta-winding side of a Transformer with in-zone
Earthing Transformer
2.3.3.3 Matching of CT Ratio

If I1 to I3 correspond to 1CT to 3CT secondary currents, differential current Id is calculated
according to the following equation,
Id = kct1I1 + kct2I2 + kct3I3
where kct1 to kct3 are settings corresponding to 1CT to 3CT.
Setting kct1 is obtained by using the following equation.
kct1 = In/Ibase1
= In/( 3  Ibase1) if 1CT is delta-connected.
where
In = rated secondary current of 1CT (1A or 5A)
Ibase1 = secondary current of 1CT based on the kVA rating of the power transformer.
 18 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
= transformer capacity(kVA)/( 3  rated voltage(kV)) / CT ratio of 1CT

If the 1CT secondary circuit is delta-connected, 3  Ibase1 is used instead of Ibase1 in the equation
above.
Settings kct2 and kct3 are obtained in the same way.
The differential current Id is zero under through-load and through-fault conditions.
kct1  I1 to kct3  I3 are equal to the rated secondary current of each CT when the rated line
currents based on the kVA rating of the power transformer flow.
 19 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
2.3.4 Connection between CT Secondary Circuit and the GRT100
GRT100 is provided with 2 or 3 three-phase current input terminals depending on the relay model.
To validate the phase angle matching described previously and apply in-phase current from each
winding to the relay, connect the CT secondary circuits to the current input terminals of the relay
as follows;
As shown below, the phases used in the phase angle setting (indicated by an arrowhead) must be
connected to the AC input terminals with the lowest number in the terminal group such as 1, 9, 17,
then the other two phases should be connected to the terminals with a larger number clockwise
from the setting phase, such as 3 and 5, 11 and 13, or 19 and 21.
Primary Secondary
Tertiary
1 3 5 21 19 17 13 11 9
GRT100
2 4 6 22 20 18 14 12 10
Figure 2.3.4.1 Connection of CT Secondary Circuit and the GRT100
Terminal numbers and corresponding input currents are shown in the following table.
Model Terminal block Terminal number Input current
100 series / 200 series TB1 1-2
3-4 Current of primary winding
5-6
9-10
11-12 Current of secondary winding
13-14
17-18
19-20 Current of tertiary winding
21-22
 20 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
2.3.5 Setting
The following shows the setting elements necessary for the current differential protection and
their setting ranges. Setting can be performed on the LCD screen or PC screen.
Element Range Step Default Remarks

DIFT
DIF ik 0.10  1.00 () 0.01 0.30 Minimum operating current
p1 10  100% 1% 100% % slope of small current region

p2 10  200% 1% 200% % slope of large current region
kp 1.00  20.00(*) 0.01 1.00 Break point of dual characteristics
k2f 10  50% 1% 15% Second harmonic detection
k5f 10  100% 1% 30% Fifth harmonic detection
HOC kh 2.00  20.00(*) 0.01 2.00 High-set overcurrent protection
CT matching
kct1 0.05  50.00 0.01 1.00 Primary winding
CT ratio kct2 0.05  50.00 0.01 1.00 Secondary winding
kct3 0.05  50.00 0.01 1.00 Tertiary winding
yd_p 1(star) / 2(delta) 1 Primary winding
Phase angle yd_s 1(star) / 2(delta) 1 Secondary winding
yd_t 1(star) / 2(delta) 1 Tertiary winding
vec_s 0 – 11 1 0 Phase angle difference between
primary and secondary
vec_t 0 – 11 1 0 Phase angle difference between
primary and tertiary
Scheme switch
[DIFTPMD] 3POR / 1P 3POR Trip mode
[2F – LOCK] Off / On On Block by second harmonic
[5F - LOCK] Off / On On Block by fifth harmonic
[DIF1] to [DIF5] Off / On (**) Output tripping signal
[CTSEN] Off / On Off CT saturation function
(): Multiplier of CT secondary rated current including CT ratio correction.
(**): Default settings are dependent on the models. See Appendix H.
 21 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Setting of ik
ik determines the minimum operation sensitivity of the DIF element. ik is set as a ratio to the CT
secondary rated current.
The minimum sensitivity setting ik is determined from the maximum erroneous differential
current under normal operating conditions.
Setting of p1, p2 and kp

Percentage restraining factor (% slope)
= (Differential current) / (Through current)
= (Differential current) / [{(Incoming current) + (Outgoing current)} /2]
p1 is the percentage restraining factor which defines the DIF restraining characteristic in the small
current region. The setting is determined by the sum of:
 CT accuracy error (generally considered as 5%)
 Tap error: Error between maximum/minimum tap and the middle tap when taking the middle
tap of the tap changer as a reference.
 Matching error: The error due to CT mismatch may be small enough to be neglected in the
setting.
 Relay calculation error, and others (5%)
The recommended setting is “Sum of above”  1.5 (margin).
p2 is the percentage restraining factor which defines the restraining characteristic in the large
current region. The setting is determined from the maximum erroneous differential current which
is generated when a large through fault current flows.
kp is the break point of the dual percentage restraining characteristics. It is set above the
maximum operating current level of the transformer between the maximum forced-cooled rated
current and the maximum emergency overload current level, as a ratio to the CT secondary rated
current.
Setting of k2f
k2f is set to detect the second harmonic content in the inrush current during transformer
energization and blocks GRT100 to prevent incorrect operation due to the inrush current. A
setting of 15% is suggested if there is no data on the minimum second harmonic content.
Setting of k5f
k5f is set to detect the fifth harmonic content during transformer over-excitation and blocks
GRT100 to prevent incorrect operation due to transient over-excitation conditions.
A setting of 30% is suggested if there is no data on the minimum fifth harmonic content.
Setting of kh
Kh is the HOC setting and should be set above the estimated maximum inrush current.
The recommended setting is more than “Maximum peak value of Inrush current”  kct.
Setting for CT ratio matching

Taking the transformer shown in Figure 2.3.5.1 as an example, the CT ratio matching settings kct1
to kct3 can be calculated as follows. For transformer capacity, take the maximum of the rated
capacites of the three windings.
 22 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Calculation steps Primary Secondary Tertiary

(1) Transformer capacity (kVA) 40  103
(2) Voltage(kV) 154 66 11
(3) Rated line current(A) 150 350 2100
=(1)/( 3  (2))
(4) CT ratio 60 120 240
(5) Secondary rated line current(A) =(3)/(4) 2.50 2.92 8.75
(6) CT secondary rating(A) 5 5 5
(7) Setting =(6)/(5) Kct1=2.00 Kct2=1.71 Kct3=0.57
Note: Using the ratio of “CT rated-current (IN)” to “Transformer rated-current (IT)”, the user can
obtain a kct value (=IN/IT). We recommend the user chooses the CT whose rated-current is not
higher than the transformer rated-current multiplied by 2 so that the DIFT function can obtain the
current accurately. The kct range (from 2.00 to 8.00) is enough to operate the protection relay
correctly. When the value of the kct is set larger than 8 (that is, the kct value is set form 8.00 to
50.00), the protection relay can operate depending on the actual input of analog current and the
DIFT settings.
Primary Secondary
CT1 40MVA 40MVA CT2
300/5 154kV 66kV 600/5
A B
CT3
1200/5
Tertiary
12MVA
11kV
kct1 kct3 kct2

GRT100
Figure 2.3.5.1 CT Ratio Matching
As explained in Section 2.3.3 for Mathcing of CT Secondary Currents, examples of setting are
described as follows:
 23 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Setting for phase angle matching

The phase angle difference between line currents on either side of the power transformer are
corrected by setting according to the hands of a clock and the transformer connections described
in IEC60076-1 as follows:
If a winding is star-connected, set 1 (=star) for winding setting yd_p, yd_s, and yd_t. If
delta-connected, set 2 (=delta). Next, set the phase angle difference vec_s and vec_t from the
primary winding as a lagging angle winding expressed in hours. One hour corresponds to lagging
by thirty degrees.
Note: In the case of a zigzag connected winding, set 2 (=delta).
Example: Setting for star/star/delta transformer.
IEC60076-1 Setting
yd_p yd_s vec_s yd_t vec_t
Primary Secondary Tertiary Y y 0 d 11 1 1 0 2 11
yd_p: Because the primary winding is star-connected, set 1.

yd_s: Because the secondary winding is star-connected, set 1.
vec_s: Because the secondary winding is in phase with the primary winding, set 0.
yd_t: Because the tertiary winding is delta-connected, set 2.
vec_t: Because the tertiary winding lags the primary winding by 330, set 11.
The settings for the transformer connections described in IEC60076-1 are listed in Table 2.3.5.2.
(Note) The following calculation is performed in the relay for phase angle correction.
Table 2.3.5.1 Phase Angle Matching Calculation
O’clock Calculation Remarks

0 Ia’ = (2Ia  Ib  Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (2Ib  Ic  Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = (2Ic  Ia  Ib)/ 3 Setting value
1 0
Ia’ = (Ia – Ib)/ 3 Ib’ = (Ib  Ic)/ 3 Ic’ = (Ic – Ia)/ 3
11 1
2 Ia’ = (Ia  2Ib  Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (Ia  Ib  2Ic)/ 3 Ic’ = (Ib  Ic 2Ia)/ 3
10 2
3 Ia’ = (Ic  Ib)/ 3 Ib’ = (Ia – Ic)/ 3 Ic’ = (Ib  Ia)/ 3
4 Ia’ = (2Ic  Ia  Ib)/ 3 Ib’ = (2Ia  Ib  Ic)/ 3 Ic’ = (2Ib  Ia  Ic)/ 3 9 3
5 Ia’ = (Ic – Ia)/ 3 Ib’ = (Ia – Ib)/ 3 Ic’ = (Ib – Ic)/ 3
6 Ia’ = (Ib  Ic 2Ia)/ 3 Ib’ = (Ia  2Ib  Ic)/ 3 Ic’ = (Ia  Ib  2Ic)/ 3 8 4
7 Ia’ = (Ib  Ia)/ 3 Ib’ = (Ic  Ib)/ 3 Ic’ = (Ia – Ic)/ 3 7 5
6
 24 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
8 Ia’ = (2Ib  Ia  Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (2Ic  Ia  Ib)/ 3 Ic’ = (2Ia  Ib  Ic)/ 3

9 Ia’ = (Ib – Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (Ic – Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = (Ia – Ib)/ 3
10 Ia’ = (Ia  Ib  2Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (Ib  Ic 2Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = (Ia  2Ib  Ic)/ 3
11 Ia’ = (Ia – Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (Ib  Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = (Ic  Ib)/ 3
 25 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Table 2.3.5.2 Setting for Phase Angle Matching

(a) Settings for typical connections of 2-windings transformer
Transformer connections Settings for phase angle correction Remarks
described in IEC60076-1
Primary, Secondary, Phase angle Diff. Phase angle matching
Primary, Secondary
(yd_p) (yd_s) (vec_s) calculation (Table 2.3.5.1)
(P) (S)
Yy0 1 1 0 P: 0 O’clock
S: 0 O’clock
Dd0 2 2 0 P: 1 O’clock
S: 1 O’clock
Yd1 1 2 1 P: 0 O’clock
S: 1 O’clock
Dy1 2 1 1 P: 11 O’clock
S: 0 O’clock
S: 3 O’clock
S: 5 O’clock
S: 5 O’clock
Dy5 2 1 5 P: 7 O’clock
S: 0 O’clock
Yy6 1 1 6 P: 0 O’clock
S: 6 O’clock
S: 7 O’clock
S: 7 O’clock
Dy7 2 1 7 P: 5 O’clock
S: 0 O’clock
S: 9 O’clock
Dd10 2 2 10 P: 1 O’clock
S: 11 O’clock
Yd11 1 2 11 P: 0 O’clock
S: 11 O’clock
Dy11 2 1 11 P: 1 O’clock
S: 0 O’clock
Dz10 2 2 10 P: 1 O’clock
S: 11 O’clock
Note: A 2-windings transformer covers a 3-windings transformer with a stabilizing-winding circuit
for which 2-windings transformer protection relay can be applied.
 26 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
(b) Settings for typical connections of 3-windings transformer
Transformer connections described in Settings for phase angle correction Remarks

IEC60076-1 Primary, Secondary, PA Diff., Tertiary, PA Diff. Phase angle matching
Primary , Secondary, Tertiary (yd_p) (yd_s) (vec_s) (yd_t) (vec_t) calculation (Table
(P) (S) (T) 2.3.5.1)
1 1 0 2 1 P: 0 O’clock
Yy0d1 S: 0 O’clock
T: 1 O’clock
1 1 0 2 11 P: 0 O’clock
Yy0d11 S: 0 O’clock
T: 11 O’clock
1 2 1 2 1 P: 0 O’clock
Yd1d1 S: 1 O’clock
T: 1 O’clock
1 2 11 2 11 P: 0 O’clock
Yd11d11 S: 11 O’clock
T: 11 O’clock
2 1 11 2 0 P: 1 O’clock
Dy11d0 S: 0 O’clock
T: 1 O’clock
2 1 1 2 0 P: 11 O’clock
Dy1d0 S: 0 O’clock
T: 11 O’clock
2 2 0 2 0 P: 1 O’clock
Dd0d0 S: 1 O’clock
T: 1 O’clock
1 1 0 1 0 P: 0 O’clock
Yy0y0 S: 0 O’clock
T: 0 O’clock
(Note) Dotted line: Reference phase
<How to set phase angle matching for GRT100>

Reference phase for phase angle matching
The phase of a star-connected winding side is used as the reference phase for phase angle
matching.
Yd: primary
Dy: secondary
Yy: primary
Dd: the reference vector leads the A phase of the primary side by 30.
Phase rotation
The relationship between each terminal current vector of a transformer, which depends on the
transformer connection and the connection between the transformer and the power system, must
be checked. The phase displacement of a delta-connected side may not be determined only by the
transformer connection described in IEC60076. Table 2.3.5.3 shows an example illustrating the
connection of a transformer and power system and their current vectors when a Yd1 type
transformer is connected to the power system with both clockwise and anticlockwise phase
rotation. In this case, the setting for phase angle correction is not corresponding to that of Table
2.3.5.1.
 27 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Table 2.3.5.3 Transformer Connection and Current Vector

Delta-side connected with 30 lagging Delta-side connected with 30 leading
Connection between Primary
Transformer
Secondary Primary
Transformer
Yd1 Secondary
Yd1
Yd1 Transformer a U u a a U u a
and Power system b V v b b V v b
c W w c c W w c
Each winding a U
Transformer u a a U
Transformer u a
connection and I1a I2a I2a’=I2aI2c I1a I1c I2c
v
I2a’=I2aI2b
b V v b b V b
Incoming/Outgoing I1b
I1b I2b I2b’=I2bI2a I1b I2b I2b’=I2bI2c
current c W w c c W w c
I1c I2c I2c’=I2cI2b I1c I1a I2a I2c’=I2cI2a
I2b’=I2bI2a I2c’=I2cI2a
Incoming current I1a I1a
I2b
I2c
vector and Outgoing I2b I2c
current vector I1c I1b
30 I2c’=I2cI2b I2b’=I2bI2c 30
I1c I1b I2a
I
I2a’=I2aI2c 2a I2a’=I2aI2b
Incoming Outgoing Incoming Outgoing
Current Current Current Current
Setting Yd_p=1, yd_s=2, vec_s=1 (Same as Yd1) Yd_p=1, yd_s=2, vec_s=11 (same as Yd11)
Auto-transformer (with internal delta-winding)

Set Yy0.
Zigzag connected transformer
Set yd_p, yd_s and vec_s to 2 (=delta) for zigzag connected side. Zero-sequence current is
canceled.
When three-winding model (model 200 series) applied to two-winding transformer:
Keep the settings of “yd_t” and “vec_t” to the default setting values.
One-and-a-half breaker system
When applied to one-and-a-half breaker system, note the DIFT and REF setting as shown in Table
2.3.5.4.
Table 2.3.5.4 Example of DIFT and REF Setting

Setting
DIFT 1REF 2REF
Yd11 Yd11 yd_p=1 1I0 --
yd_s=2
vec_s=11
One-and-a-half breaker system

Yd11
Yy0d11 yd_p=1 2Io --
yd_s=1
vec_s=0
yd_t=2
vec_s=11
Yy0d11 Yy0d11 yd_p=1 1I0 1I0
yd_s=1
vec_s=0
yd_t=2
vec_s=11
 28 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
2.4 Restricted Earth Fault Protection

Restricted earth fault protection (REF) is a zero-phase current differential scheme applied to a
star-connected winding whose neutral is earthed directly or through a low impedance. It gives
highly sensitive protection for internal earth faults.
REF employs a low impedance current differential scheme which detects the differential current
between the zero-sequence current I0 derived from the three-phase line currents and the neutral
current IN in the neutral conductor as shown in Figure 2.4.1.
  
Ia+Ib+Ic
REF
IN
Figure 2.4.1 Restricted Earth Fault Protection
REF and the overall differential protection DIFT use the three-phase line currents in common.
GRT100 has two or three REF elements depending on the model, providing separate protection
for all star-connected and neutral-earthed windings.
The elements have the same percentage restraining characteristics and are stable for all faults
outside the protected zone.
Figure 2.4.2 shows the block diagram of the REF element which is composed of REF_DIF and
REF_DEF. The REF_DIF has a percentage restraining characteristic while the REF_DEF
provides a directional check feature to discriminate between internal and external faults. The
REF_DEF element provides additional security against incorrect operation of the REF element in
the event of saturation of the neutral CT. The REF_DEF is blocked when the maximum phase
current exceeds 2  kct  (Rated current of neutral CT), since the REF element is used for earth
fault protection of transformer winding. For details, see Section 2.11.3. In case of terminal current
larger than that, the DIFT element provides tripping.
REF_DIF
REF
REF_DEF &
internal fault detection
Ires≦2.0×Max_kct
Figure 2.4.2 Block Diagram of REF
Figure 2.4.3 shows the scheme logic of the restricted earth fault protection when three REF
elements are applied. Each REF element can perform instantaneous or time-delayed tripping of
up to five breakers. Any of the five breaker tripping signals 1REF-1 to 3REF-5 are enabled or
disabled by the scheme switch [1REF1] to [3REF5] settings.
Note: Models 103, 203 and 204 are not provided with 1REF-4, 1REF5, 2REF-4, 2REF-5, 3REF-4 and
3REF-5.
 29 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
T1REF
t 0
1REF & 1REF-1
[1REF1]

0.00 - 10.00s
“ON”
& 1REF-2
[1REF2]

“ON”
& 1REF-3
[1REF3]

“ON”
& 1REF-4
[1REF4]

“ON”
& 1REF-5
[1REF5]

“ON”
2REF-1
2REF Same as above 2REF-2
2REF-3
2REF-4
2REF-5
3REF-1
3REF Same as above 3REF-2
3REF-3
3REF-4
3REF-5
Note: Models 103, 203 and 204 are not provided with 1REF-4, 1REF5, 2REF-4, 2REF-5, 3REF-4 and
3REF-5.
Figure 2.4.3 Scheme Logic of Restricted Earth Fault Protection
Appendix L shows applications of the three REF elements to various types of transformers. When
protecting a two- or three-winding transformer, 1REF, 2REF and 3REF elements should be
applied to the primary (or high-voltage) winding, secondary (or medium-voltage) winding and
tertiary (or low-voltage) winding respectively. This is also valid for auto-transformer protection
but the application must comply with Appendix L.
In the application to auto-transformers, one REF element may introduce two or three line currents
and one neutral current as shown in Appendix L. 1REF to 3REF elements recognize the number of
the line currents according to the scheme switch setting of [1REF] to [3REF].
 30 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Setting
The following shows the setting elements for the restricted earth fault protection and their setting
ranges.

1REF 1ik 0.05  0.50(*) 0.01 0.50 Minimum operating current
1kct1 1.00  50.00 0.01 1.00
1kct2 1.00  50.00 0.01 1.00 CT ratio matching
1kct3 1.00  50.00 0.01 1.00
1p2 50  100% 1% 100% % slope of DF2
1kp 0.50  2.00(*) 0.01 1.00 DF2 restraining current section of
large current characteristic
2kct1 1.00  50.00 0.01 1.00
2kct3 1.00  50.00 0.01 1.00
2p2 50  100% 1% 100% % slope of DF2
3kct1 1.00  50.00 0.01 1.00
3kct3 1.00  50.00 0.01 1.00
3p2 50  100% 1% 100% % slope of DF2
T1REF 0.00  10.00s 0.01s 0.00s
T2REF 0.00  10.00s 0.01s 0.00s Delayed tripping
T3REF 0.00  10.00s 0.01s 0.00s
Scheme switch
[1REF1] to [1REF5] Off/On (**) Enable or disable to output
tripping signal
[2REF1] to [2REF5] Off/On (**)
[3REF1] to [3REF5] Off/On (**)
Number of line currents input to
[1REF] to [3REF] 1Io/2Io/3Io 1Io
1REF, 2REF and 3REF elements
(*): Multiplier of secondary rated current
Setting of ik (1ik, 2ik and 3ik)

1ik, 2ik and 3ik are minimum operating current settings and are set as a ratio to the line CT
secondary rated current. ik is determined from the maximum erroneous zero sequence differential
current under normal operating conditions. A typical setting would be between 10% and 50%.
 31 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Setting of kct (1kct1-1kct3, 2kct1-2kct3 and 3kct1-3kct3)

CT ratio matching is performed between the line CT(s) and the neutral CT by setting 1kct1-1kct3
for 1REF element, 2kct1-2kct3 for 2REF element and 3kct1-3kct3 for 3REF element. The settings
are obtained as a ratio of the line CTs ratio to the neutral CT ratio and the line CTs have the
notations shown in Appendix L according to 1REF to 3REF applications.
For example, the settings of 1kct1, 1kct2, 2kct1 and 2kct2 are calculated;
1kct1 = (CT ratio of line CT 1ct-1)/(CT ratio of neutral CT 1nCT)
where,
CT ratio = (primary rated current)/(secondary rated current).
Setting of scheme switch [1REF] to [3REF]

[1REF] to [3REF] are set to "1I0", "2I0" or "3I0" when they introduce one, two or three line
currents respectively.
 32 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
2.5 Overcurrent Protection

GRT100 provides definite time and inverse time overcurrent elements for both phase faults and
earth faults, separately for each transformer winding. Three phase currents from each set of line
CTs are used for the phase fault protection elements, while the earth fault protection is based on
the neutral CT input.These elements can be used selectively depending on the requirements of the
particular application, but the following points should be noted:
 In the case of large power transformers, overcurrent protection is usually employed only as
back-up protection for terminal faults, and for uncleared LV system faults. In such cases,
the overcurrent elements can be applied either on one or both sides of the transformer as
required.
 Coverage of internal transformer faults is generally limited.
 It is common practice to apply IDMTL phase and earth fault overcurrent protection as
back-up for the LV system. Current and time settings must be arranged to grade with
downstream relays and fuses. The phase fault current setting must also be set to exceed the
maximum overload current.
 High-set instantaneous overcurrent protection can be applied on the primary side to provide
back-up protection for terminal faults. The current setting must be higher than the maximum
through-fault current to ensure that the element does not operate for faults on the LV side.
One of the following IEC-standard-compliant inverse time characteristics or one long time
inverse characteristic is available for the inverse current protection.
 standard inverse IEC 60255-3
 very inverse IEC 60255-3
 extremely inverse IEC 60255-3
Up to three definite time elements (1OC to 3OC) and inverse time elements (1OCI to 3OCI) input
three phase currents from line CTs in the transformer windings.
Up to three definite time elements (1EF to 3EF) and inverse time elements (1EFI to 3EFI) input
neutral currents from CTs in the neutral circuit.
Figure 2.5.1 and Figure 2.5.2 show the scheme logic of overcurrent protection. Each element can
perform time-delayed tripping of up to five breakers. The breaker tripping signals are blocked by
the scheme switch settings.
The number of overcurrent elements applied depends on the relay models.
 33 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
T1OC
A t 0
1 & 1OC-1
1OC B
[1OC1]
C 
0.00 - 10.00s
“ON”
& 1OC-2
[1OC2]

“ON”
& 1OC-3
[1OC3]

“ON”
& 1OC-4
[1OC4]

“ON”
& 1OC-5
[1OC5]

“ON”
A
1 & 1OCI-1
1OCI B
[1OCI1]
C 
“ON”
& 1OCI-2
[1OCI2]

“ON”
& 1OCI-3
[1OCI3]

“ON”
& 1OCI-4
[1OCI4]

“ON”
& 1OCI-5
[1OCI5]

“ON”
Note: 2OC and 3OC provide the same logic as 1OC. 2OCI and 3OCI provide the same logic as 1OCI.
Models 103, 203 and 204 are not provided with 1OC-4, 1OC-5, 2OC-4, 2OC-5, 3OC-4, 3OC-5,
1OCI-4, 1OCI-5, 2OCI-4, 2OCI-5, 3OCI-4 and 3OCI-5.
Figure 2.5.1 Scheme Logic of the Overcurrent Protection
 34 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
T1EF
t 0
1EF & 1EF-1
[1EF1]

0.00 - 10.00s
“ON”
& 1EF-2
[1EF2]

“ON”
& 1EF-3
[1EF3]

“ON”
& 1EF-4
[1EF4]

“ON”
& 1EF-5
[1EF5]

“ON”
1EFI & 1EFI-1

[1EFI1]

“ON”
& 1EFI-2
[1EFI2]

“ON”
& 1EFI-3
[1EFI3]

“ON”
& 1EFI-4
[1EFI4]

“ON”
& 1EFI-5
[1EFI5]

“ON”
Note: 2EF and 3EF provide the same logic as 1EF. 2EFI and 3EFI provide the same logic as 1EFI.
Models 103, 203 and 204 are not provided with 1EF-4, 1EF-5, 2EF-4, 2EF-5, 3EF-4, 3EF-5,
1EFI-4, 1EFI-5, 2EFI-4, 2EFI-5, 3EFI-4 and 3EFI-5.
Figure 2.5.2 Scheme Logic of the Overcurrent Protection for Earth Faults
 35 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Setting
The following shows the setting elements for the overcurrent protection and their setting ranges.

1OC 0.10  20.0(*) 0.01 2.00 Definite time overcurrent (line)
T1OC 0.00  10.00s 0.01s 1.00s Delayed tripping for 1OC
1OCI 0.10  5.00(*) 0.01 1.00 Inverse time overcurrent (line)
T1OCI 0.05  1.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier setting for 1OCI
1EF 0.10  20.00(*) 0.01 2.00 Definite time overcurrent (neutral)
T1EF 0.00  10.00s 0.01s 1.00s Delayed tripping for 1EF
1EFI 0.10  5.00(*) 0.01 1.00 Inverse time overcurrent (neutral)
T1EFI 0.05  1.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier setting for 1EFI
Scheme switch Inverse time characteristic selection of
M1OCI to M3OCI Long-Std-Very-Ext Std OCI elements
M1EFI to M3EFI Long-Std-Very-Ext Std EFI elements
Scheme switch Off/On (**) Enable or disable tripping by
[1OC1] to [3OC5] OC elements
[1OCI1] to [3OCI5] OCI elements
[1EF1] to [3EF5] EF elements
[1EFI1] to [3EFI5] EFI elements
(*) : Multiplier of CT secondary rated current.
(**) : Default settings are dependent on the models. See Appendix H.
The overcurrent elements use the same three-phase line currents and neutral current as the
 36 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
differential protection and the restricted earth fault protection. When choosing settings, the
following relationships between the overcurrent elements and the connected windings must be
taken into account.
1OC, 1OCI : Primary (high-voltage) winding
2OC, 2OCI : Secondary (medium-voltage) winding
3OC, 3OCI : Tertiary (low-voltage) winding
1EF, 1EFI : 1REF applied neutral circuit
 37 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
2.6 Thermal Overload Protection

The thermal overload protection is applied to protect transformers from electrical thermal
damage. A-phase current is used to detect the thermal overload of a transformer. The
characteristics are exponential functions according to the IEC 60255-8 standard and take into
account the I2R losses due to the particular operational current and the simultaneous cooling due
to the coolant. In this way the tripping time during an overload condition takes the pre-load into
consideration. An alarm stage can be set to operate before reaching the tripping condition.
Figure 2.6.1 shows the scheme logic of the thermal overcurrent protection. THR tripping output
can be given to up to five breakers. Any of the five breaker tripping signals THR-1 to THR-5 can
be blocked by the scheme switch [THR1] to [THR5] settings. Alarming signal THR-A can be
blocked by the scheme switch [THRA] setting.
S & THR-1
[THR1]
THR 
A “ON”
& THR-2
[THR2]

“ON”
& THR-3
[THR3]

“ON”
& THR-4
[THR4]

“ON”
& THR-5
[THR5]

“ON”
& THR-A
[THRA]

“ON”
Note: Models 103, 203 and 204 are not provided with THR-4 and THR-5.
Figure 2.6.1 Scheme Logic of Thermal Overload Protection
Setting
The following shows the setting elements for the thermal overload protection and their setting
ranges.
 0.5  500.0min 0.1min 60.0min Thermal time constant
k 0.10  4.00 0.01 1.30 Constant
IB 0.50  2.50(*1) 0.01 1.00 Basic current
Ip 0.00  1.00(*1) 0.01 0.00 Pre-specified load current
TA 0  10min 1min 10min Time for alarm (before trip) (*3)
Scheme switch Enable or disable
THR1 to THR5 Off/On (*2) Trip
THRA Off/On On Alarm
(1): Multiplier of CT secondary rated current
(*2): Default settings are dependent on the models. See Appendix H.
(*3): Alarming time = THR trip time (operating time) – TA (setting time)
Note: Ip sets a minimum level of previous load current to be used by the thermal element, and is
typically used when testing the element. For the majority of applications, Ip should be set to
zero, in which case the previous load current, Ip, is calculated internally by the thermal
model, providing memory of conditions occurring before an overload.
 38 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
2.7 Frequency Protection

GRT100 provides underfrequency or overfrequency protection and/or alarms for load shedding or
for detecting such an overfrequency condition caused by disconnecting load from a particular
generation location.
The frequency element FRQ comprises two frequency elements 81-1 and 81-2, the former is used
for tripping and the latter for alarms.
Figure 2.7.1 shows the scheme logic of the frequency protection. The tripping element 81-1
outputs underfrequency and overfrequency trip signals L1 and H1. Either underfrequency or
overfrequency protection is selected by setting the scheme switch [FRQ-UF1] to “ON” or “OFF”.
The alarm element 81-2 outputs underfrequency and overfrequency alarm signals L2 and H2.
Either underfrequency or overfrequency alarms are selected by setting the scheme switch
[FRQ-UF2] to “ON” or “OFF”.
Frequency protection can perform time-delayed tripping of up to five breakers. Any of the breaker
tripping signals FRQ-1 to FRQ-5 can be blocked by the scheme switch [FRQ1] to [FRQ5]
settings.
Note: Models 103, 203 and 204 are not provided with FRQ-4 and FRQ-5.
Alarm signal FRQ-A can be blocked by the scheme switch [FRQA] setting.
Frequency protection is blocked under the condition that the system voltage is lower than the
setting of the undervoltage element UV.
TFRQL
t 0
L1 & 1 & FRQ-1
[FRQ1]

L2 0.00 - 60.00s
& “ON”
81-1
TFRQH & FRQ-2
81-2
H1 & t 0 [FRQ2]

1
“ON”
H2 & 0.00 - 60.00s & FRQ-3
1
[FRQ3]
UV 1 
“ON”
& FRQ-4
FRQ-UF1 [FRQ4]
 
“ON” “ON”
FRQ-UF2 & FRQ-5

[FRQ5]
“ON” 
“ON”
TFRQA
t 0
1 & FRQ-A
[FRQA]
0.00 - 60.00s 
“ON”
Note: Models 103, 203 and 204 are not provided with FRQ-4 and FRQ-5.
Figure 2.7.1 Scheme Logic of Frequency Protection
 39 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Setting
The following shows the setting elements for the frequency protection and their setting ranges.

81-1 (L1, H1) 45.00  55.00Hz 0.01Hz 49.00Hz Trip
(54.00  66.00Hz 0.01Hz 59.00Hz) (*)
81-2 (L2, H2) 45.00  55.00Hz 0.01Hz 48.00Hz Alarms
(54.00  66.00Hz 0.01Hz 58.00Hz)
UV 40  100V 1V 40V Undervoltage block
TFRQL 0.00  60.00s 0.01s 10.00s Underfrequency trip time
delay
TFRQH 0.00  60.00s 0.01s 10.00s Overfrequency trip time
delay
TFRQA 0.00  60.00s 0.01s 10.00s Alarm time delay
Scheme switch Enable or disable
[FRQ-UF1] Off/On On Trip
[FRQ-UF2] Off/On On Alarm
[FRQ1] to [FRQ5] Off/On (**) Trip
[FRQA] Off/On On Alarm
(*) : Frequency values shown in parentheses are for the case of 60Hz rating. Other frequency values
are shown for the case of 50Hz rating.
 40 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
2.8 Overexcitation Protection

Overexcitation protection is applied to protect transformers from overvoltage and overfluxing
conditions.
Any single phase-to-phase connected voltage is used to detect overexcitation. Trip and alarm
characteristics, which are based on a measurement of the voltage/frequency ratio, are provided.
Figure 2.8.1 shows the scheme logic of overexcitation protection. Overexcitation element V/F
responds to voltage/frequency and outputs three signals. Signal T has an inverse time
characteristic. Signals H and A have high-set and low-set definite time characteristics
respectively. Signal T and signal H with a delayed pick-up timer TVFH are used for tripping.
Signal A is used for alarm with a delayed pick-up timer TVFA.
The V/F element has a reset feature with definite time reset. The reset time RT is set to match the
cooling characteristic that is the time for the protected transformer to reach a normal temperature
after releasing the overexitation condition.
81
T & V/F-1
TVFH 1
[V/F1]
80 t 0 
V/F H “ON”
& V/F-2
82 1 - 600s [V/F2]
A 
“ON”
& V/F-3
[V/F3]

“ON”
& V/F-4
[V/F4]

“ON”
& V/F-5
[V/F5]

“ON”
TVFA
t 0
& V/F-A
[V/FA]

1 - 600s
“ON”
Note: Models 103, 203 and 204 are not provided with V/F-4 and V/F-5.
Figure 2.8.1 Scheme Logic of Overexcitation Protection
Overexcitation protection can trip up to five breakers. Any of the breaker tripping signals V/F-1 to
V/F-5 can be blocked by the scheme switch [V/F1] to [V/F5] settings.
Note: Models 103, 203 and 204 are not provided with V/F-4 and V/F-5.
Alarm signal V/F-A can be blocked by the scheme switch [V/FA] setting.
 41 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Setting
The following shows the setting elements for the overexcitation protection and their setting
ranges.
V 100.0  120.0V 0.1V 100.0V Transformer rated voltage / VT ratio
A 1.03  1.30 () 0.01 1.03 Alarm
L 1.05  1.30 0.01 1.05 Low level
H 1.10  1.40 0.01 1.40 High level
LT 1  600s 1s 600s Operation time at low level
(Inverse time curve)
HT 1  600s 1s 1s Operation time at high level
(Inverse time curve)
RT 60  3600s 1s 250s Reset time after removing
overexcitation condition
TVFH 1  600s 1s 10s Operating time at high level setting
(Definite time delay)
TVFA 1  600s 1s 10s Alarm time
(Definite time delay)
Scheme switch
[V/F1] to [V/F5] Off/On (**) Enable or disable tripping
[V/FA] Off/On On Enable or disable alarm
(): Multiplier of (rated voltage) / (rated frequency)
(**): Refer to Appendix H for default setting.
A: Alarm level
H: High level (definite time tripping)
V/Hz L: Low level (pick up level)
HT: Operating time at high level
H LT: Operating time at low level
TVFH: Operating time at high level setting
TVFA: Alarm time
Withstand curve for transformer overexcitation
L
A
0 TVFA HT LT sec
TVFH (log T)
Figure 2.8.2 Setting Points
 42 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
2.9 Trip by External Devices

Up to four binary signals EXT. MECHANICAL TRIP1 to EXT. MECHANICAL TRIP4 can be
used for tripping external devices. Figure 2.9.1 shows the scheme logic for the signal
EXT_MEC.TP1. The signal can trip up to five breakers. Any of the tripping signals
EXT_MEC.TP1-1 to EXT_MEC.TP4-5 can be blocked by the scheme switches [M.T1-1] to
[M.T1-5] setting.
Note: Models 103, 203 and 204 are not provided with EXT_MEC.TP1-4 and EXT_MEC.TP1-5, and
[M.T1-4] and [M.T1-5].
The other binary signals have the same scheme logic.
EXT. MECHANICAL TRIP1 & EXT_MEC.TP1-1

[M.T1-1]

“ON”
& EXT_MEC.TP1-2
[M.T1-2]

“ON”
& EXT_MEC.TP1-3
[M.T1-3]

“ON”
& EXT_MEC.TP1-4
[M.T1-4]

“ON”
& EXT_MEC.TP1-5
[M.T1-5]

“ON”
Figure 2.9.1 Scheme Logic of Trip by External Device
Setting
The following shows the setting elements for tripping by external devices and their setting ranges.
Scheme switch Enable or disable tripping
EXT_MEC.TP1-1 to -5
EXT_MEC.TP2-1 to -5 Off/On (*)
EXT_MEC.TP3-1 to -5
EXT_MEC.TP4-1 to -5
(*): Default settings are dependent on the model. See Appendix H.
 43 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
2.10 Tripping Output

Figure 2.10.1 shows the tripping logic. Each protection can output five tripping signals to enable
tripping for five breakers. The tripping signals are set according to the number of breakers to be
tripped and drive the heavy duty, high-speed tripping output relays TRIP-1 to TRIP-5.
Note: Models 103, 203 and 204 are not provided with TRIP-4 and TRIP-5.
When the scheme switch [L/O] is set to “ON”, the tripping output relays are latched and can only
be reset by energizing a binary input for ‘Indication Reset’ operation. When the switch is set to
“OFF”, they are reset automatically after clearing the fault.
The tripping output relays reset 200ms after the tripping signal disappears. When [L/O] is set to
“OFF”, the tripping circuit must be opened with the auxiliary contact of the breaker prior to reset
of the tripping relay to prevent the tripping relay from directly interrupting the tripping current of
the breaker.
 44 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
TRIP-1
[L/O]
 Tripping output
“ON” relay
DIFT-1 O] & S Q 0 t TRIP-1
1 1 F/F 1
R
1OC-1 0.2s
1OCI-1 1 1
1REF-1 &
1EF-1
1EFI-1
1
2OC-1
2OCI-1 1
2REF-1 Indication Reset
2EF-1
2EFI-1
3OC-1
3OCI-1 1
3REF-1
3EF-1
3EFI-1
FRQ-1
V/F-1 1
THR-1
MECHANICAL TRIP1-1
MECHANICAL TRIP2-1 1
MECHANICAL TRIP3-1
MECHANICAL TRIP4-1
TRIP-2
0 t TRIP-2
Same as TRIP-1
0.2s
TRIP-3
0 t TRIP-3
Same as TRIP-1
0.2s
TRIP-4
0 t TRIP-4
Same as TRIP-1
0.2s
TRIP-5
0 t TRIP-5
Same as TRIP-1
0.2s
Figure 2.10.1 Tripping Logic
 45 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
2.11 Characteristics of Measuring Elements

2.11.1 Percentage Current Differential Element DIF
The segregated-phase current differential element DIF has dual percentage restraining
characteristics. Figure 2.11.1 shows the characteristics of DF1 and DF2 on the differential current
(Id) and restraining current (Ir) plane. Id is a vector summation of phase current of all windings
and Ir is a scalar summation of phase current of all windings.
Id Id = 2Ir (one-end infeed)
DF2
ik DF1
ik kp Ir
2
Figure 2.11.1 Current Differential Element
Characteristic DF1 is expressed by the following equation:

Id  p1  Ir  (1 p1/2)ik
where,
p1 : slope of DF1
ik : minimum operating current
Id and Ir are defined as follows for a three-winding transformer.
Id = | kct1I1 + kct2I2 + kct3I3 |
Ir =(kct1|I1 |+ kct2|I2 |+ kct3|I3 |)/2
where,
kct1 ,kct2 ,kct3 : CT ratio matching settings of primary, secondary and tertiary winding
I1 ,I2 ,I3 : currents of primary, secondary and tertiary winding
This characteristic has weaker restraint in the small current region and ensures sensitivity to low
level faults.
Id  p2  Ir  (p1 p2)kp  (1 p1/2)ik
where,
p2 : slope of DF2
kp : break point of DF1 characteristic
This characteristic has stronger restraint in the large current region and ensures stability against
CT saturation during through faults.
 46 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
2.11.2 High-set Overcurrent Element HOC
High-set overcurrent element HOC is an instantaneous overcurrent characteristic, and is applied

in the differential circuit. The characteristic is expressed by the following equation:
Id  kh
Id is defined as follows for three-winding transformer.
Id = | kct1I1 + kct2I2 + kct3I3 |
where,
kct1 ,kct2 ,kct3 : CT ratio matching settings of primary, secondary and tertiary winding
HOC is an un-restrained current differential element which can protect a transformer against
damage due to a heavy internal fault, because it has a simple operation principle and high-speed
operation. Note that HOC is not immune to transformer inrush currents and therefore cannot be
applied with a sensitive setting.
2.11.3 Restricted Earth Fault Element REF
The restricted earth fault element REF is composed of REF_DIF and REF_DEF, as was shown in
Figure 2.4.2.
The REF_DIF has dual percentage restraining characteristics. Figure 2.11.2 shows the
characteristics on the differential current (Id) and restraining current (Ir) plane. Id is the
differential current between the residual current of each winding and the neutral current and Ir is
the restraining current which is the larger of the residual current and the neutral current.
Id
DF2
max-kctik DF1
kp Ir
max-kctik
Figure 2.11.2 REF_DIF Characteristic

Id  p1Ir + (1-p1) ikmax-kct
where,
p1 : slope of DF1 (fixed to 10%)
ik : minimum operating current
max-kct : CT ratio matching of line CT to neutral CT (when plural line CTs are applied,
maximum kct is employed.)
For the 1REF element, Id and Ir are calculated by the following equations when applied to a circuit
with one neutral CT and three line CTs. (For the REF element application, see Appendix L.)
Id = |1kct1I1o + 1kct2I2o + 1kct3I3o + IN |
 47 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Ir = max.( 1kct1|I1a| , 1kct1|I1b| , 1kct1|I1c| , 1kct2|I2a| , 1kct2|I2b| , 1kct2|I2c| ,1kct3|I3a| ,

1kct3|I3b| , 1kct3|I3c| , |IN| )
where,
I1o ,I2o ,I3o : residual current of primary, secondary and tertiary winding
I1a ,I1b ,I1c ,I2a ,I2b ,I2c ,I3a ,I3b ,I3c : phase current of primary, secondary and tertiary winding
IN : residual current of neutral circuit
1kct1, 1kct2, 1kct3: CT ratio matching of primary, secondary and tertiary line CT to neutral
CT
Id  p2 (Irkp)
where
p2 : slope of DF2
kp : break point of DF1 characteristic
The characteristic of REF_DEF is composed of a directional characteristic and a non-directional

characteristic as shown in Figure 2.11.3 (a) and (b). This characteristic is employed so that the
REF is not blocked at one-end infeed current IN.
90
(*1)
3I0
180 0 0
IN Ik2 3I0
Ik1
Operating
zone
270
Ik1, ik2: Current sensitivity (fixed)

IN: Neutral current of transformer
3I0: Zero sequence current (calculated from Ia, Ib, Ic)
*1: MAX(Ia,Ib,Ic)  2MAX(kct1,kct2,kct3)
(a) (b)
Figure 2.11.3 REF_DEF Characteristic
The REF_DEF detects an internal fault by checking the direction between transformer neutral
current IN and zero-sequence current 3I0 calculated from phase currents Ia, Ib and Ic. The
REF_DEF is blocked when the maximum phase current is larger than 2 times of Max-kct as
follows:
Max.(1kct1I1a, ….1kct3I3c)  IBLK=Max.(1kct1,1kct2,1kct3)2
 48 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
(Example)
Primary Secondary
CT ratio: 2400/1 CT ratio: 3600/1
kct1=2 kct2=3
I01 I02 max-kct = 3
Therefore, REF is blocked at
IBLK=32.0=6A (CT secondary)
CT ratio:
1200/1 If the maximum of phase
1REF IN currents of both primary and
secondary windings is 7200A
(=6x1200A), the REF is blocked.
Reference current: 1200A
(Rated current of neutral CT)
2.11.4 Inverse Time Overcurrent Element OCI and EFI
The OCI and EFI elements have one long time inverse characteristic and three inverse time
characteristics in conformity with IEC 60255-3 as shown in Figure 2.11.4. One of these
characteristics can be selected.
These characteristics are expressed by the following equations and curves.
(s) T=1.0
200
100
50
Long Time Inverse

120
t=T
(I/Is)1 20
Standard Inverse
0.14 10
t=T
(I/Is)0.02  1
Long-time Inverse
Very Inverse 5
13.5 Operating
t = T  (I/Is)  1 time
Standard Inverse
2
Extremely Inverse
80
t=T
(I/Is)2  1 1
Very Inverse
where,
0.5
t : operating time
I : fault current
Is : current setting
T : time multiplier setting 0.2 Extremely Invease
0.1
1 2 5 10 20 30
Current I (Multiple of setting current)
Figure 2.11.4 Characteristics of Inverse Time Overcurrent Element
 49 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
2.11.5 Definite Time Overcurrent element OC and EF
The OC and EF elements measure the phase currents and the residual current respectively.
2.11.6 Thermal Overload Element THR
Thermal overload element THR has a characteristic based on thermal replica according to the IEC
60255-8 standard (see Appendix N), which evaluates the phase current (A-phase) of the CT
secondary circuits. Figure 2.11.5 shows the characteristic of THR element. The element has trip
and alarm stages.
Trip stage:
I2  Ip2
t =   Ln I2  (k  I )2
B
Alarm stage:
(I2  Ip2)  (1  TA/)
t =   Ln
I2  (k  IB)2
where
t: operating time
: thermal time constant
I: load current
kIB : allowable overload current as specified in IEC 60255-8 (refer to Appendix N)
IB : basic current of transformer (rated current)
k : constant (allowable overload current / IB)
Ip : prior load current before the overload occurs
TA : time for alarm
(Alarming time = t (operating time) – TA (setting time)
Ln : natural logarithm
Figure 2.11.6 shows the thermal curve for a range of time constant settings in the cold state when
the prior load current Ip is zero.
 50 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
TA
Trip
Alarm
TA
0 K  IB I
Figure 2.11.5 Characteristic of Thermal Overload Element
Thermal Curves (Cold Curve - no

prior load)
10000
1000
100
Operate Time (minutes)

10
500
100
1
50
20
10
0.1
5
2
1
0.01
1 10
Overload Current (Multiple of kIB)
Figure 2.11.6 Thermal Curves
 51 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
2.11.7 Frequency Element FRQ
GRT100 has two elements for trip or alarm. Each element operates either in overfrequency or
underfrequency.
2.11.8 Overexcitation Element V/F
The characteristic is based on the ratio of voltage to frequency. The alarm is definite time
delayed, while the tripping characteristic is either definite time or inverse time, as shown in
Figure 2.11.7.
A: Alarm level
H: High level (definite time tripping)
V/Hz L: Low level (pick up level)
HT: Operating time at high level
H LT: Operating time at low level
TVFH: Operating time at high level setting
TVFA: Alarm time
L
A
0 TVFA HT LT sec
TVFH (log T)
Figure 2.11.7 Characteristic of Overexcitation Element
The inverse time characteristic of V/F is expressed by the following equation.

K2
t=
(V/F)  K1
where,
t : operating time
V : voltage (any phase-to-phase voltage)
F : frequency
V/F=(Vm/Fm) / (Vs/Fs)
(Vm: Input voltage, Fm: Input frequency, Vs: Setting of rated voltage, Fs: Rated frequency)
(LT)  L  (HT)  H
K1=
(LT)  (HT)
(LT)  (HT)  (H  L)
K2=
(LT)  (HT)
The V/F element has a reset feature with definite time reset (RT). When the V/F falls below the
reset threshold, the integral state of the inverse time function is reset to the initial value after the
RT time.
Example: V/F=(Vin/Fin)/(V/Fs)=(130/50)/(100/50)=1.3, in case of Vin: Input voltage (130V),
Fin: Input frequency (50Hz), V: Rated voltage (100V), Fs: Rated frequency (50Hz)
 52 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
3. Technical Description
3.1 Hardware Description
3.1.1 Outline of Hardware Modules
The case outline of GRT100 is shown in Appendix F.

The hardware structures of the models are shown in Figure 3.1.1 to Figure 3.1.4. The front view
shows the equipment without the human machine interface module.
The GRT100 consists of the following hardware modules. The human machine interface
module is provided with the front panel.
 Transformer module (VCT)
 Signal processing module (SPM)
 Binary input and output module #1 (IO1 or IO8)
 Binary input and output module #2 (IO2)
 Binary output module #3 (IO3)
 Human machine interface module (HMI)
Front view without front panel
VCT IO2 SPM IO1 or

IO8
Figure 3.1.1 Hardware Structure (Model: 101, 103, 201, 203)
 53 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
VCT IO3 IO2 SPM IO1 or

IO8
Figure 3.1.2 Hardware Structure (Model: 102, 202, 204)
The correspondence between each model and module used is as follows:
Models 101 102 103 201 202 203 204

Module
VCT       
SPM       
IO1    
IO2       
IO3   
IO8   
HMI       
Note: The VCT and SPM modules are not interchangeable among different models.
The hardware block diagram of the GRT100 using these moduls is shown in Figure 3.1.3.
 54 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Binary I/O Module (IO1 or IO8)
DC/DC
Converter DC
Transformer supply
Signal Processing Module (SPM)
Module (VCT)
Binary input
13 or 12
I
CT8 Analogue A/D
or CT12 filter Converter Binary output
AC input or CT15 MPU1 MPU2 (High speed) Trip
5 or 3 command
V
VT1
Binary I/O Module (IO2)
Binary output
14
External
clock IRIG-B
port Binary input
3
RS485
Remote
Transceiver Setting and
Monitoring
System
Human Machine Interface (HMI)
Binary I/O Module (IO3)(*1)
Liquid crystal display
40characters4lines Binary output
10
LEDs Operation keys
Local RS232C Monitoring jacks

Personal I/F
Computer
(*1) I03: required for Model 102, 202, 204
Figure 3.1.3 Hardware Block Diagram (Models 101, 102, 103, 201, 202, 203 and 204)
 55 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
3.1.2 Transformer Module
The transformer module (VCT module) provides isolation between the internal and external
circuits through auxiliary transformers and transforms the magnitude of the AC input signals to
suit the electronic circuits. The AC input signals are as follows:
 three-phase currents (Ia, Ib and Ic) for each winding
 neutral current (IN) for each winding
 phase-to-phase voltage
Figure 3.1.4 shows a block diagram of the transformer module. There are 8 to 12 auxiliary CTs
and 1 auxiliary VT mounted in the transformer module depending on the relay model. (For the
correspondence between the relay model and number of AC input signals, see Table 3.2.1.)
The transformer module is also provided with an IRIG-B port. This port collects the serial
IRIG-B format data from an external clock for synchronization of the relay calendar clock. The
IRIG-B port is isolated from the external circuit by a photo-coupler. A BNC connector is used as
the input connector.
Ia1
Ib1
Ic1
IN1
I a2
Signal
processing
I b2 module
I c2
I N2
IRIG-B port
External
clock
BNC connector
Figure 3.1.4 Transformer Module (e.g. models 101, 102, 103)
 56 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
3.1.3 Signal Processing Module
As shown in Figure 3.1.5, the signal processing module (SPM) consists of an analogue filter,
multiplexer, analogue to digital (A/D) converter and main processing units (MPU1 and MPU2)
and executes all kinds of processing such as protection, measurement, recording and display.
The analogue filter performs low-pass filtering for the corresponding current and voltage
signals.
The A/D converter has a resolution of 16 bits and samples input signals at sampling frequencies
of 2400 Hz (at 50 Hz) and 2880 Hz (at 60 Hz).
The MPU1 carries out operations for the measuring elements and scheme logic operations for
protection, recording, displaying and signal transmission control. It implements 60 MIPS and
uses two RISC (Reduced Instruction Set Computer) type 32-bit microprocessors.
Analogue filter RAM ROM
Analogue Analogue filter Multiplexer A/D Other

MPU1
input converter modules
Analogue filter
Figure 3.1.5 Signal Processing Module
 57 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
3.1.4 Binary Input and Output Module
There are four types of binary input and output module (IO module): These modules are fitted
according to the model (see Section 3.1.1).
3.1.4.1 IO1 and IO8 Module

IO1 and IO8 provide a DC/DC converter, binary inputs and binary outputs for tripping.
As shown in Figure 3.1.4.1, the IO1 module incorporates a DC/DC converter, 15 photo-coupler
circuits (BI) for binary input signals and 6 auxiliary relays (TP1 to 5) dedicated to the circuit
breaker tripping command.
As shown in Figure 3.1.4.2, the IO8 module incorporates a DC/DC converter, 12 photo-coupler
circuits (BI) for binary input signals and 3 auxiliary relays (TP) dedicated to the circuit breaker
tripping command. The 12 binary inputs have dedicated positive and negative inputs suitable for
double-pole switching.
The nominal input voltage rating of the DC/DC converter is 24V, 48V, 110V/125V or
220V/250V. The normal range of input voltage is 20% to +20%.
The five or three tripping command auxiliary relays are the high-speed operation type and have
one normally open output contact.
DC
() Line filter DC/DC
supply
() converter
FG
Photo-coupler
Auxiliary relay
BI
(high speed)
BI -
TP-1
Binary BI TP-2
input
signals TP-3
( 15) Tripping
command
TP-4
BI
TP-5
BI
Figure 3.1.4.1 IO1 Module
 58 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
IO8 module
(+) Line filter DC/DC

DC () converter
supply
FG
Photo-coupler Auxiliary relay
(high speed)
BI
BI -TP-1
Tripping
Binary BI TP-2 command
input ( 3)
signals TP-3
( 12)
BI
BI
Figure 3.1.4.2 IO8 Module
 59 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
3.1.4.2 IO2 Module

As shown in Figure 3.1.7, the IO2 module incorporates 3 photo-coupler circuits (BI14-BI16) for
binary input signals, 14 auxiliary relays (BO1-BO13 and FAIL) for binary output signals and an
RS-485 transceiver.
The auxiliary relay FAIL has one normally closed contact, and operates when a relay failure or
abnormality in the DC circuit is detected. BO1 to BO13 each have one normally open contact.
BO12 and BO13 are the high-speed operation type.
The RS-485 transceiver is used for the link with the remote setting and monitoring (RSM) system.
The external signal is isolated from the relay internal signal.
Auxiliary relay
BO1
Photo-coupler
BI14 BO2 Binary
Binary output
input BI15 signals
signals
BI16 FAIL
RS-485
Transceiver Link with RSM
system
RS-485
Transceiver Link with
IEC60870-5-103
Communication
system
Figure 3.1.7 IO2 Module
 60 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
3.1.4.3 IO3 Module

The IO3 module is used to increase the number of binary outputs.
The IO3 module incorporates 10 auxiliary relays (BO1-BO10) for binary outputs. All auxiliary
relays each have one normally open contact.
IO3 module Auxiliary relay
BO1
BO2
Binary
output
BO9 signals
BO10
Figure 3.1.8 IO3 Module
 61 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
3.1.5 Human Machine Interface (HMI) Module
The operator can access the GRT100 via the human machine interface (HMI) module. As shown
in Figure 3.1.9, the HMI module has a liquid crystal display (LCD), light emitting diodes (LED),
view and reset keys, operation keys, testing jacks and an RS-232C connector on the front panel.
The LCD consists of 40 columns by 4 rows with a backlight and displays record, status and setting
data.
There are a total of 8 LED indicators and their signal labels and LED colors are defined as
follows:
Label Color Remarks
IN SERVICE Green Lit when relay is in service.
TRIP Red Lit when trip command is issued.
ALARM Red Lit when failure is detected.
TESTING Red Lit when disabling automatic monitoring function or resetting
the time counting of THR and V/F elements by the
scheme switches.
(LED1) Red
(LED2) Red
(LED3) Red
(LED4) Red
LED1 to LED4 are user-configurable.

Once it has started operating, the TRIP LED continues to operate even after the trip command
disappears. Pressing the RESET key resets it. Other LEDs operate as long as a signal is present.
The RESET key is ineffective for these LEDs.
The VIEW key starts the LCD indication and switches between windows. The reset key clears the
LCD indication and turns off the LCD backlight.
The operation keys are used to display the record, status and setting data on the LCD, input the
settings or change the settings.
The monitoring jacks and two pairs of LEDs, A and B, on top of the jacks can be used while the
test mode is selected in the LCD window. Signals can be displayed on LED A or LED B by
selecting the signal to be observed from the "Signal List" or "Variable Timer List" and setting it in
the window and the signals can be transmitted to an oscilloscope via the monitoring jacks. (For
the "Signal List" or "Variable Timer List", see Appendix B or C.)
The RS-232C connector is a 9-way D-type connector for serial RS-232C connection. This
connector is used for connection with a local personal computer.
 62 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
TRANSFORMER PROTECTION
GRT100
101C-21-11
Operation
keys
Figure 3.1.9 Front Panel
 63 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
3.2 Input and Output Signals

3.2.1 Input Signals
AC input signals
Table 3.2.1 shows the AC input signals necessary for each of the GRT100 models and their
respective input terminal numbers. See Appendix G for external connections.
Winding 1, 2 and 3 in the Table correspond to high-voltage or primary, medium-voltage or
secondary, and low-voltage or tertiary winding respectively.
Table 3.2.1 AC Input Signals
Terminal GRT100-101, 102, 103 Terminal GRT100-201, 202, 203, 204

No. No.
TB1 TB1
1-2 A phase current of winding 1 1-2 A phase current of winding 1
3-4 B phase current of winding 1 3-4 B phase current of winding 1
5-6 C phase current of winding 1 5-6 C phase current of winding 1
7-8 Neutral current of winding 1 7-8 Neutral current of winding 1
9-10 A phase current of winding 2 9-10 A phase current of winding 2
11-12 B phase current of winding 2 11-12 B phase current of winding 2
13-14 C phase current of winding 2 13-14 C phase current of winding 2
15-16 Neutral current of winding 2 15-16 Neutral current of winding 2
17-18  17-18 A phase current of winding 3
19-20  19-20 B phase current of winding 3
21-22  21-22 C phase current of winding 3
23-24  23-24 Neutral current of winding 3
25-26  25-26 
27-28 Phase to phase voltage of 27-28 Phase to phase voltage of
winding 1 winding 1
30 (earth) 30 (earth)
Binary input signals

Table 3.2.2 shows the binary input signals necessary for the GRT100, their driving contact
conditions and functions enabled. See Appendix G for external connections.
The binary input circuit of the GRT100 is provided with a logic level inversion function as shown
in Figure 3.2.1. Each input circuit has a binary switch BISW which can be used to select either
normal or inverted operation. This allows the inputs to be driven either by normally open or
normally closed contacts. Where the driving contact meets the contact conditions indicated in
Table 3.2.2 then the BISW can be set to “N” (normal). If not, then “I” (inverted) should be
selected.
The default setting of the BISW is "N" (normal) for all input signals.
Further, all binary input functions are programmable by PLC (Programmable Logic Circuit)
function.
If a signal is not required, the function concerned is disabled.
The operating voltage of binary input signal is typical 74V DC at 110V/125V DC rating and 138V
DC at 220/250V DC. The minimum operating voltage is 70V DC at 110/125V DC rating and
125V DC at 220/250V DC.
 64 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Table 3.2.2 Binary Input Signals
Signal Names Driving Contact Condition / Function Enabled BISW (default)

External Mechanical trip Closed when external device operated. / Initiate trip command 1
(EXT_MEC.TP1) from operation of external device.
Indication reset Closed to reset TRIP LED indication. / Reset indication 5
externally.
Protection block Closed to block the protection. / Block the protection 6
externally.
Signal for event record Closed when external device operated. / Initiate event record 14
with external signal.
Signal No.
(+) () GRT100
BI1
External Mechanical trip BISW1 (Norm) Protection
BI1 PLC function schemes
1
(Inv)
External Mechanical trip BI2

BISW2 (Norm) Programmable
BI2
1
(Inv) logic
BI3
External Mechanical trip BISW3 (Norm)
BI3
1
(Inv)
0V
Figure 3.2.1 Logic Level Inversion
3.2.2 Binary Output Signals
The number of output binary signals and their output terminals vary depending on the relay
model. See Appendix G for details. For all models, all outputs except the tripping command,
signal for command protections and relay failure signal can be configured.
The signals shown in the signal list in Appendix B can be assigned to the output relay individually
or in arbitrary combinations. Signals can be combined using either an AND circuit or OR circuit
with 6 gates each as shown in Figure 3.2.2. The output circuit can be configured according to the
setting menu. Appendix D shows the factory default settings.
A 0.2s delayed drop-off timer can be attached to these assigned signals. The delayed drop-off time
is disabled by the scheme switch [BOTD].
The relay failure contact closes when a relay defect or abnormality in the DC power supply circuit
is detected.
 65 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Signal List +(ON)

BOTD
(OFF)
&
0 t Auxiliary relay
Appendix C 6 GATES &
≧1
OR 0.2s
≧1
6 GATES
Figure 3.2.2 Configurable Output
3.2.3 PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Function
GRT100 is provided with a PLC function allowing user-configurable sequence logics on binary
signals. The sequence logics with timers, flip-flops, AND, OR, NOT logics, etc. can be produced
by using the PC software “PLC editor tool” and linked to signals corresponding to relay elements
or binary circuits.
Configurable binary inputs, binary outputs and LEDs, and the initiation trigger of disturbance
record are programmed by the PLC function. Temporary signals are provided for complicated
logics or for using a user-configured signal in many logic sequences.
PLC logic is assigned to protection signals by using the PLC editor tool. For PLC editor tool, refer
to PLC editor instruction manual.
Figure 3.2.3 Sample Screen of PLC Editor
 66 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
3.3 Automatic Supervision

3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision
Though the protection system is in a non-operating state under normal conditions, it is waiting for
a power system fault to occur at any time and must operate for the fault without fail. Therefore,
the automatic supervision function, which checks the health of the protection system during
normal operation by itself, plays an important role. A numerical relay based on microprocessor
technology is able to implement such as automatic supervision function. GRT100 implements an
automatic supervision function based on the following concept:
 The supervising function should not affect protection performance.
 Perform supervision with no omissions wherever possible.
 When a failure occurs, it should be possible to easily identify the failure location.
Note: Automatic supervision function includes automatic monitor function and automatic test
function. For the terminology, refer to IEC IEV 60448.
3.3.2 Relay Monitoring and Testing

The relay is supervised with the following items.
AC input imbalance monitoring

The AC current input is monitored such that the following equation is satisfied and the health of
the AC input circuit is checked.
Max(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|)  4  Min(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|)  k0
where,
Max(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) = Maximum amplitude among Ia, Ib and Ic
Min(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) = Minimum amplitude among Ia, Ib and Ic
k0 = 20% of rated current
A/D accuracy checking

An analogue reference voltage is transmitted to a prescribed channel in the analogue-to-digital
(A/D) converter, and it is checked that the data after A/D conversion is within a prescribed range
and that the A/D conversion characteristics are correct.
Memory monitoring
The memories are monitored as follows depending on the type of the memory and checked that
the memory circuits are healthy:
 Random access memory monitoring:
Writes/reads prescribed data and checks the storage function.
 Program memory monitoring: Checks the checksum value of the written data.
 Setting value monitoring: Checks discrepancy between the setting values stored in
duplicate.
Watchdog Timer
A hardware timer which is cleared periodically by software is provided and it is checked that the
software is running normally.
 67 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
DC Supply monitoring
The secondary voltage level of the built-in DC/DC converter is monitored and checked that the
DC voltage is within a prescribed range.
3.3.3 Failure Alarms
When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed with LCD display, LEDs
indication, external alarms and event recording. Table 3.3.1 summarizes the supervision items
and alarms.
The LCD messages are shown on the "Auto-supervision" screen which is displayed automatically
when a failure is detected or displayed by pressing the VIEW key. The event record messages
are shown on the "Event record" screen by opening the "Record" sub-menu.
Those alarms are retained until the failure is recovered.
Those alarms can be disabled collectively by setting the scheme switch [AMF] to OFF. The
setting is used to block unnecessary alarms during commissioning test or maintenance.
When the Watchdog Timer detects that the software fails to running normally, LCD display and
event recording on the failure cannot be expected.
DC supply failure disables the LCD display and event recording on the failure as well.
For the discrimination of the two failures mentioned above, refer to Section 6.7.2.
Table 3.3.1 Supervision Items and Alarms
Supervision Item LCD Message LED LED Ext. alarm Event record
"IN SERVICE" "ALARM" Message
AC input (1) On/Off (2) On (4) CT err
imbalance monitoring Relay fail
A/D accuracy check (1) Off On (4) Relay fail
Memory monitoring
Watchdog Timer ---- Off On (4) ----
DC supply monitoring ---- Off (3) (4) Relay fail
(1): Diverse messages are provided as expressed with "---fail" in the Table in Section 6.7.2.
(2): The LED is on when the scheme switch [SVCNT] is set to "ALM" and off when set to
"ALM & BLK" (refer to Section 3.3.4).
(3): Whether the LED is lit or not depends on the degree of the voltage drops.
(4): The binary output relay "FAIL" operates.
3.3.4 Trip Blocking
When a failure is detected by the following supervision items, the trip function is blocked as long
as the failure exists and restored when the failure is removed.
 A/D accuracy check
 Memory monitoring
 Watchdog Timer
 DC supply monitoring
When a failure is detected by the AC input imbalance monitoring, the scheme switch [SVCNT]
 68 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
setting can be used to determine if both tripping is blocked and an alarm is initiated, or, if only an
alarm is initiated.
3.3.5 Setting
The setting elements necessary for the automatic supervision and its setting range are shown in
the table below.

[SVCNT] ALM&BLK / ALM ALM&BLK Alarming and/or blocking
 69 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
3.4 Recording Function

GRT100 is provided with the following recording functions:
Fault recording
Event recording
Disturbance recording
These records are displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on the local or remote PC.
3.4.1 Fault Recording
Fault recording is started by a tripping command of the GRT100 or PLC command by user-setting
(max. 4) and the following items are recorded for one fault:
Date and time of fault occurrence
Operating phase or fault phase
Tripping command
Tripping mode
Power system quantities
Up to the 4 most-recent faults can be stored as fault records. If a new fault occurs when 4 faults
have been stored, the record of the oldest fault is deleted and the record of the latest fault is then
stored.
Date and time of fault occurrence

The time resolution is 1ms using the relay internal clock.
To be precise, this is the time at which a tripping command has been initiated, and thus it is
approximately 10 ms after the occurrence of the fault.
Operating phase or fault phase

The operating phase or fault phase can be selected to be displayed following tripping, depending
on the requirements of user.
For details, see Section 2.3.1.
Tripping command
The tripping output relay(s) operated is shown in terms of its number (e.g. TP-1: 1, TP-2: 2 etc.).
Tripping mode
This shows the protection scheme that initiated the tripping command.
Power system quantities

The following power system quantities for pre-fault and post-fault are recorded.
- Magnitude and phase angle of phase current of each winding (Ia1, Ib1, Ic1 up to Ia3, Ib3, Ic3)
- Magnitude and phase angle of neutral current of each winding (In1 up to In3)
- Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component current of each winding (I11, I21, I01
up to I13, I23, I03)
- Magnitude and phase angle of phase-to-phase voltage (V)
 70 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
- Magnitude of phase differential current (Ida, Idb, Idc)

- Magnitude of residual differential current for REF protection (Id01 up to Id03)
- Percentage of thermal capacity (THM%)
Phase angles above are expressed taking that of the voltage as a reference phase angle. If the
voltage input is not provided, then the positive sequence current of the primary winding is used as
a reference phase angle.
3.4.2 Event Recording

The events shown in Table 3.4.1 are recorded with a 1 ms resolution time-tag when their status
changes. The user can select the recording items.
Up to 96 records can be stored. If an additional event occurs when 96 records have been stored,
the oldest event record is deleted and the latest event record is then stored.
Table 3.4.1 Event Record Items
Event LCD Indication

Mechanical trip 1 command output or reset Mech. trip 1 On or Off
Trip command output or reset Trip On or Off
Indication reset input or reset Ind. reset On or Off
Relay failure detected or restored Relay fail On or Off
CT1 current circuit failure detected or restored CT1 err On or Off
External event signal 1 output or reset Event 1 On or Off
System setting changed (*) Sys. set change
Relay setting changed (*) Rly. set change
Group setting changed (*) Grp. set change
(*): The event of setting change is classified into three events. The event "System setting changed"
corresponds to all the setting changes except setting changes in the sub-menu "Protection". (See
section 4.2.6 for changing the settings). The event "Relay setting changed" corresponds to
setting change of measuring elements and timers in the sub-menu "Protection". The event
"Group setting changed" corresponds to other setting changes in the sub-menu "Protection".
Setting
The recording mode can be set for each event. One of the following four modes is selectable.
Modes Setting
Not to record the event. None
To record the event when the status changes to "operate". Operate
 71 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
To record the event when the status changes to "reset". Reset

To record the event when the status changes both to "operate" and "reset". Both
For the setting, see the Section 4.2.6.5. The default setting is "Both" for all events except those
marked with (*) in Table 3.4.1. The events marked with (*) have a default setting of "Operate".
3.4.3 Disturbance Recording
Disturbance Recording is started when overcurrent starter elements operate or a tripping

command is output, or PLC command by user-setting (max. 4: Signal No. 2632 to 2635) is output.
The records include 13 analog signals (primary: Ia1, Ib1, Ic1, In1, secondary: Ia2, Ib2, Ic2, In2,
tertiary: Ia3, Ib3, Ic3, In3, voltage: V). Following binary signals listed below and the dates and
times at which recording started are also recorded.
-Trip-1 -5F -2OCI -FRQ
-Trip-2 -1REF -3OCI -V/F
-Trip-3 -2REF -1EF -THR
-Trip-4 -3REF -2EF -Mec. Trip
-Trip-5 -1OC -3EF
-DIFT -2OC -1EFI
-HOC -3OC -2EFI
-2F -1OCI -3EFI
The LCD display only shows the dates and times of disturbance records stored. Details can be
displayed on the PC. For how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the PC software
instruction manual.
The pre-fault recording time is fixed at 0.3s and post-fault recording time can be set between 0.1
and 3.0s.
The number of records stored depends on the post-fault recording time. The approximate
relationship between the post-fault recording time and the number of records stored is shown in
Table 3.4.2.
Note: If the recording time setting is changed, all previously recorded data is deleted.
Table 3.4.2 Post Fault Recording Time and Number of Disturbance Records Stored
Recording
Model time 0.1s 0.5s 1.0s 1.5s 2.0s 2.5s 3.0s
Frequency
101, 102 50Hz 40 21 12 9 7 6 5
103 60Hz 35 17 10 7 6 5 4
201, 202 50HZ 31 15 9 7 5 4 3
203, 204 60Hz 26 13 8 5 4 3 3
Disturbance recording is initiated when overcurrent elements operate, a tripping signal is output,
2F or 5F element operates or external event signals are input. Three-phase overcurrent elements
1OCP-S to 3OCP-S are applied to the line CTs and neutral overcurrent elements 1OCP-G to
3OCP-G to the neutral CTs.
The initiations are blocked by the scheme switches.
 72 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Settings
The elements necessary for starting disturbance recording and their setting ranges are shown in
the table below.
Element Range Step Default(**) Remarks
1OCP-S 0.10 - 20.00(*) 0.01 Phase overcurrent element
2OCP-S 0.10 - 20.00(*) 0.01
3OCP-S 0.10 - 20.00(*) 0.01
1OCP-G 0.05 - 20.00(*) 0.01 Neutral overcurrent element
2OCP-G 0.05 - 20.00(*) 0.01
3OCP-G 0.05 - 20.00(*) 0.01
Scheme switch ON/OFF Initiating disturbance record
TRIP1 to TRIP5 by tripping
1OCPS to 3OCPS by phase overcurrent element
1OCPG to 3OCPG by neutral overcurrent element
2F by 2F element
5F by 5F element
EVENT1 to EVENT3 by external event
(*) : Multiplier of CT secondary rated current
 73 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
3.5 Metering Function

The GRT100 performs continuous measurement of the analogue input quantities. The
measurement data shown below are displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on the local
or remote PC.
- Magnitude and phase angle of phase current of each winding (Ia1, Ib1, Ic1 up to Ia3, Ib3, Ic3)
- Magnitude and phase angle of neutral current of each winding (In1 up to In3)
- Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component current of each winding (I11, I21, I01
up to I13, I23, I03)
- Magnitude and phase angle of phase-to-phase voltage (V)
- Magnitude of phase differential current (Ida, Idb, Idc)
- Magnitude of residual differential current for REF protection (Id01 up to Id03)
- Percentage of thermal capacity (THM%)
- Frequency
Phase angles above are expressed taking that of positive sequence voltage as a reference phase
angle, where leading phase angles are expressed as positive values.
The above system quantities are displayed in values on the primary side or on the secondary side
of the CT according to a setting. To display accurate values, it is necessary to set the CT ratio and
VT ratio too. For the setting method, see "Setting the transformer parameters" in 4.2.6.7.
 74 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
4. User Interface
4.1 Outline of User Interface
The user can access the relay from the front panel.
Local communication with the relay is also possible using a personal computer (PC), equipped
with the RSM (Relay Setting and Monitoring) software via an RS232C port. Furthermore, remote
communication is also possible using a PC equipped with the RSM via an RS485 and a protocol
converter.
This section describes the front panel configuration and the basic configuration of the menu tree
of the local human machine communication ports and HMI (Human Machine Interface).
4.1.1 Front Panel
As shown in Figure 3.1.13, the front panel is provided with a liquid crystal display (LCD), light
emitting diodes (LED), operation keys, VIEW and RESET keys, monitoring jack and RS232C
connector.
LCD
The LCD screen, provided with a 4-line, 40-character back-light, displays detailed information of
the relay interior such as records, status and setting. The LCD screen is normally unlit, but
pressing the VIEW key will display the digest screen and pressing any key other than VIEW
and RESET will display the menu screen.
These screens are turned off by pressing the RESET key or END key. If any display is left for
5 minutes or longer without operation, the back-light will go off.
LED
There are 8 LED displays. The signal labels and LED colours are defined as follows:
Label Color Remarks
IN SERVICE Green Lit when the relay is in service.
TRIP Red Lit when a trip command is issued.
ALARM Red Lit when a failure is detected.
TESTING Red Lit when disabling automatic monitoring function or resetting the
time counting of THR and V/F elements by the scheme switches.
(LED1) Red
(LED2) Red
(LED3) Red
(LED4) Red
LED1 to LED4 are configurable.

The TRIP LED lights up once the relay is operating and remains lit even after the trip command
goes off. The TRIP LED can be turned off by pressing the RESET key. Other LEDs are lit as
long as a signal is present and the RESET key is invalid while the signal is being maintained.
 75 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Operation keys
The operation keys are used to display records, status, and set values on the LCD, as well as to
input or change set values. The function of each key is as follows:
 0-9, : Used to enter a selected number, numerical values and text strings.
 , : Used to move between lines displayed on a screen
Keys 2, 4, 6 and 8 marked with , , and are also used to enter text
strings.
 CANCEL : Used to cancel entries and return to the upper screen.
 END : Used to end entry operation, return to the upper screen or turn off the display.
 ENTER : Used to store or establish entries.
VIEW and RESET keys

Pressing VIEW key displays digest screens such as "Metering", "Latest fault" and "Auto-
supervision".
Pressing RESET key turns off the display.
Monitoring jacks
The two monitoring jacks A and B and their respective LEDs can be used when the test mode is
selected on the LCD screen. By selecting the signal to be observed from the "Signal List" and
setting it on the screen, the signal can be displayed on LED A or LED B, or transmitted to an
oscilloscope via a monitoring jack.
RS232C connector
The RS232C connector is a 9-way D-type connector for serial RS232C connection with a local
personal computer.
 76 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
4.1.2 Communication Ports
The following three interfaces are provided as communication ports:

 RS232C port
 RS485 port
 IRIG-B port
RS232C port
This connector is a standard 9-way D-type connector (straight type) for serial port RS232C
transmission and is mounted on the front panel. By connecting a personal computer to this
connector, setting and display functions can be performed from the personal computer.
RS485 port
Two RS485 ports can be provided.
One RS485 port (PORT-1: COM1) is used to connect between relays and between the relay and
the protocol converter G1PR2 to construct a network communication system. (For the system
configuration, see Figure 4.4.1 in Section 4.4.) The other port (PORT-2: COM2) is used to
communicate substation control and monitoring system (Protocol: IEC 60870-5-103).
This port is on the back of the relay, as shown in Figure 4.1.1.
IRIG-B port
The IRIG-B port is mounted on the transformer module, and collects serial IRIG-B format data
from the external clock to synchronize the relay calendar clock. The IRIG-B port is isolated from
the external circuit by a photo-coupler. A BNC connector is used as the input connector.
This port is on the back of the relay, as shown in Figure 4.1.1.
36-pin terminal block

20-pin terminal block
IRIG BNC
connector
PORT-1
(COM1) PORT-2
RS485 (COM2)
connection
terminal
Figure 4.1.1 Locations of Communication Port
 77 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
4.2 Operation of the User Interface

The user can access such functions as recording, measurement, relay setting and testing with the
LCD display and operation keys.
4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays
Displays during normal operation

When the GRT100 is operating normally, the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and the LCD is off.
Press the VIEW key when the LCD is off to display the digest screens which are "Metering",
"Latest fault" and "Auto-supervision" screens in turn. The last two screens are displayed only
when there is some data. The following are the digest screens and can be displayed without
entering the menu screens.
Meterin g1 08/Dec/1997 22:56
Ia1 *** .*kA I a2 **.**kA I n1 **.**kA
Ib1 *** .*kA I b2 **.**kA I n2 **.**kA
Ic1 *** .*kA I c2 **.**kA
Meterin g2 08/Dec/1997 22:56

Ia3 *** .*kA I n3 **.**kA
Ib3 *** .*kA V ***.*kV
Ic3 *** .*kA **.*Hz
Note: I 1 for primary(high-voltage) winding current
I 2 for secondary(medium-voltage) winding current
I 3 for tertiary(low-voltage) winding current
Ia, Ib, Ic for phase current
In for neutral current
Press the RESET key to turn off the LCD.

For any display, the back-light is automatically turned off after five minutes.
Displays in tripping
Latest fault 08/Dec/1997 22:56:**.***
Phase BC Trip 1-2-3-4-5
DIFT
If a fault occurs and a tripping command is initiated when the LCD is off, the "Latest fault" screen
is displayed on the LCD automatically and the red "TRIP" LED and, if signals assigned to trigger
by tripping, other configurable LEDs light.
Press the VIEW key to display the digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and
"Auto-supervision" screens.
Press the RESET key to turn off the LEDs and LCD display.
Notes:
1) When configurable LEDs (LED1 through LED4) are assigned to latch signals by trigger of
tripping, press the RESET key more than 3s until the LCD screens relight. Confirm turning off
the configurable LEDs. Refer to Table 4.2.1 Step 1.
 78 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
2) Then, press the RESET key again on the "Latest fault" screen in short period, confirm turning
off the "TRIP" LED. Refer to Table 4.2.1 Step 2.
3) When only the "TRIP" LED goes off by pressing the RESET key in short period, press the
RESET key again to reset remained LEDs in the manner 1) on the "Latest fault" screen or other
digest screens. LED1 through LED4 will remain lit in case the assigned signals are still active
state.
Table 4.2.1 Turning off latch LED operation
LED lighting status

Operation "TRIP" LED Configurable LED
(LED1 - LED4)
Step 1 Press the RESET key more than 3s on
the "Latest fault" screen
continue to lit turn off
Step 2 Then, press the RESET key in short

period on the "Latest fault" screen
turn off
If the tripping command is initiated when any of the screens is displayed, the current screen
remains displayed and the red "TRIP" LED lights.
When any of the menu screens is displayed, the VIEW and RESET keys do not function. To
return to the digest screen, do the following:
 Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END key.
 Press the END key to turn off the LCD.
 Press the VIEW key to display the "Latest fault" screen.
 Press the RESET key to turn off the "TRIP" LED and LCD.
Displays in automatic supervision operation

Auto-supervision 08/Dec/1997 22:56
DIO err
If the automatic supervision function detects a failure while the LCD is off, the
"Auto-supervision" screen is displayed automatically, showing the location of the failure and the
"ALARM" LED lights.
Press the VIEW key to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest
fault" screens.
Press the RESET key to turn off the LEDs and LCD display. However, if the failure continues,
the "ALARM" LED remains lit.
 79 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
After recovery from a failure, the "ALARM" LED and "Auto-supervision" display turn off
automatically.
If a failure is detected while any of the screens is displayed, the current screen remains displayed
and the "ALARM" LED lights.
Notes:
1) When configurable LEDs (LED1 through LED4) are assigned to latch signals by issuing an alarm,
press the RESET key more than 3s until all LEDs reset except "IN SERVICE" LED.
2) When configurable LED is still lit by pressing RESET key in short period, press RESET key
again to reset remained LED in the above manner.
3) LED1 through LED4 will remain lit in case the assigned signals are still active state.
While any of the menu screen is displayed, the VIEW and RESET keys do not function. To
return to the digest "Auto-supervision" screen, do the following:
 Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END key.
 Press the END key to turn off the LCD.
 Press the VIEW key to display the digest "Auto-supervision" screen.
 Press the RESET key to turn off the LCD.
4.2.2 Relay Menu
Figure 4.2.1 shows the menu hierarchy in the GRT100. The main menu has five sub-menus,
"Record", "Status", "Setting (view)", "Setting (change)", and "Test". For details of the menu
hierarchy, see Appendix E.
 80 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Menu Record Fault record

Event record
Disturbance record
Status Metering
Binary input & output
Relay element
Time synchronization source
Clock adjustment
Setting (view) Relay version

Description
Communication
Record
Status
Protection
Binary input
Binary output
LED
Setting (change) Password

Description
Communication
Record
Status
Protection
Binary input
Binary output
LED
Test Switch
Binary output
Timer
Logic circuit
Figure 4.2.1 Relay Menu
 81 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Record
In the "Record" menu, the fault records, event records and disturbance records are displayed or
erased.
Status
The "Status" menu displays the power system quantities, binary input and output status, relay
measuring element status, signal source for time synchronization (IRIG-B, RSM or IEC) and
adjusts the clock.
Setting (view)
The "Setting (view)" menu displays the relay version, plant name and the current settings of relay
address and RS232C baud rate in communication, record, status, protection, configurable binary
inputs and outputs, and configurable LEDs.
Setting (change)
The "Setting (change)" menu is used to set or change the settings of password, plant name, relay
address and RS232C baud rate in communication, record, status, protection, configurable binary
inputs and outputs, and configurable LEDs.
Since this is an important menu and is used to set or change settings related to relay tripping, it has
password security protection.
Test
The "Test" menu is used to set testing switches, to forcibly operate binary output relays, to
measure variable timer time and to observe the binary signals in the logic circuit.
When the LCD is off, press any key other than the VIEW and RESET keys to display the top
"MENU" screen and then proceed to the relay menus.
MENU
1=Record 2=Status
3=Setting(view) 4=Setting(change)
5=Test
To display the "MENU" screen when the digest screen is displayed, press the RESET key to
turn off the LCD, then press any key other than the VIEW and RESET keys.
Press the END key when the top screen is displayed to turn off the LCD.
An example of the sub-menu screen is shown below. The top line shows the hierarchical layer of
the screen, screen title and total number of lines of the screen. The last item is not displayed for all
the screens. "/6" displayed on the far left means that the screen is in the sixth hierarchical layer,
while 1/7 displayed on the far right means that the screen has seven lines excluding the top line
and that the cursor is on the first line.
To move the cursor downward or upward for setting or for viewing other lines not displayed on
the window, use the and keys.
 82 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
/6 VT & CT ratio 1/ 7
1CT ( 1- 20O00): 2000
2CT ( 1- 20O00): 1000
3CT ( 1- 20O00): 400
1 nCT ( 1- 20O00): 1 00
2 nCT ( 1- 20O00): 1 00
3 nCT ( 1- 20O00): 1 00
V T ( 1- 20O00): 4 00
To move to the lower screen or move from the left-side screen to the right-side screen in Appendix
E, select the appropriate number on the screen. To return to the higher screen or move from the
right-side screen to the left-side screen, press the END key.
The CANCEL key can also be used to return to the higher screen but it must be used carefully
because it may cancel entries made so far.
To move between screens of the same hierarchical depth, first return to the higher screen and then
move to the lower screen.
4.2.3 Displaying Records
The sub-menu of "Record" is used to display fault records, event records and disturbance records.
4.2.3.1 Displaying Fault Records

To display fault records, do the following:
 Open the top "MENU" screen by pressing any keys other than the VIEW and RESET keys.
 Select 1 (= Record) to display the "Record" sub-menu.
/1 Record
1=Fault record 2=Event record
3=Disturbance record
 Select 1 (= Fault record) to display the "Fault record" screen.

/2 Fault Record
1=Display 2=Clear
 Select 1 (= Display) to display the dates and times of fault records stored in the relay from the
top in new-to-old sequence.
/3 Fault record 1/ 4
#1 16/Oct/1997 18:13:57.031
#2 20/Sep/1997 15:29 :22 .463
#3 04/Jul/1997 11:54:53.977
 Move the cursor to the fault record line to be displayed using the and keys and press
the ENTER key to display the details of the fault record.
 83 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
／４ＦａｕｌｔＲｅｃｏｒｄ＃１３／４２

１６／Ｏｃｔ／１９９７１８：１３：５７．０３１
ＰｈａｓｅＢＣＴｒｉｐ１-２-３-４-５
ＤＩＦＴ
Ｐｒｅｆａｕｌｔｖａｌｕｅｓ
Ｉａ１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊° ｌａ２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉｂ１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊° ｌｂ２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉｃ１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊° ｌｃ２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉ１１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊° ｌ１２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉ２１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊° ｌ２２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉ０１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊° ｌ０２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉｎ１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊° ｌｎ２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉａ３＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉｂ３＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉｃ３＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉ１３＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉ２３＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉ０３＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉｎ３＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｖ＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉｄａ＊＊＊．＊＊ｐｕｌｄ０１＊＊＊．＊＊ｐｕ
Ｉｄｂ＊＊＊．＊＊ｐｕｌｄ０２＊＊＊．＊＊ｐｕ
Ｉｄｃ＊＊＊．＊＊ｐｕｌｄ０３＊＊＊．＊＊ｐｕ
Ｆａｕｌｔｖａｌｕｅｓ
Ｉａ１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊° ｌａ２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉｂ１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊° ｌｂ２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉｃ１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊° ｌｃ２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉ１１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊° ｌ１２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉ２１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊° ｌ２２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉ０１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊° ｌ０２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉｎ１＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊° ｌｎ２＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉａ３＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉｂ３＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉｃ３＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉ１３＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉ２３＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉ０３＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉｎ３＊＊．＊＊ｋＡ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｖ＊＊＊．＊ｋＶ＊＊＊．＊°
Ｉｄａ＊＊＊．＊＊ｐｕｌｄ０１＊＊＊．＊＊ｐｕ
Ｉｄｂ＊＊＊．＊＊ｐｕｌｄ０２＊＊＊．＊＊ｐｕ
Ｉｄｃ＊＊＊．＊＊ｐｕｌｄ０３＊＊＊．＊＊ｐｕ
ＴＨＭ＊＊＊．＊％

I1, I2, I0 for symmetrical component current
Ida, Idb, Idc for differential current
Ido1, Ido2, Ido3 for zero-phase differential current in 1REF, 2REF, 3REF
The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the and keys.
To clear all the fault records, do the following:
 Open the "Record" sub-menu.
 Select 1 (Fault record) to display the "Fault record" screen.
 Select 2 (= Clear) to display the following confirmation screen.
 84 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
/2 Fault record
Clear all fault records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
 Press the ENTER (= Yes) key to clear all the fault records stored in non-volatile memory.
If all fault records have been cleared, the "Latest fault" screen of the digest screens is not
displayed.
4.2.3.2 Displaying Event Records

To display events records, do the following:

 Select 2 (= Event record) to display the "Event record" screen.
/2 Event Record
1=Display 2=Clear
 Select 1 (= Display) to display the events with date and time from the top in new-to-old
sequence.
/3 Eve nt record 2/48
16/Oct /1998 23:18:04.294 Trip Off
16/Oct /1998 23:18:03.9 13 Trip On
12/Feb /1998 03:51:37.622 Rly.set change
To clear all the event records, do the following:

 Select 2 (Event record) to display the "Event record" screen.
/2 Event record
Clear all event records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
 Press the ENTER (= Yes) key to clear all the event records stored in non-volatile memory.
4.2.3.3 Displaying Disturbance Records

Details of the disturbance records can be displayed on the PC screen only (*); the LCD displays
only the recorded date and time for all disturbances stored in the relay. To display them, do the
following:
(*) For the display on the PC screen, refer to RSM100 manual.
 85 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

 Select 3 (= Disturbance record) to display the "Disturbance record" screen.
/ 2 Dis t u rba n c e reco rd
1 = D i s p l ay 2=Clear
 Select 1 (= Display) to display the date and time of the disturbance records from the top in
new-to-old sequence.
/3 Disturbance record 3 /12
#1 16/Oct/1997 18:13:57.031
#2 20/Sep/1997 15:29 :22 .463
#3 04/Jul/1997 11:54:53.977
To clear all the disturbance records, do the following:

 Select 3 (Disturbance record) to display the "Disturbance record" screen.
/2 Disturbance record
Clear all disturbance records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
 Press the ENTER (= Yes) key to clear all the disturbance records stored in non-volatile
memory.
4.2.4 Displaying the Status
From the sub-menu of "Status", the following statuses can be displayed on the LCD:
Metering data of the protected transformer
Status of binary inputs and outputs
Status of measuring elements output
Status of time synchronization source
The data are renewed every second.
This sub-menu is also used to adjust the time of the internal clock.
4.2.4.1 Displaying Metering Data

To display metering data on the LCD, do the following.
 Select 2 (= Status) on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
 86 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
/1 Status
1=Metering 2=Binary I/O
3=Relay element 4=Time sync source
5 = C l o c k a d j u s t m ent
 Select 1 (= Metering) to display the "Metering" screen.

/2 Metering 16/Oct/1997 18:13 3/19
Ia1 .kA . Ia2 .kA .
Ib1 .kA . Ib2 .kA .
Ic1 .kA . Ic2 .kA .
I11 .kA . I12 .kA .
I21 .kA . I22 .kA .
I01 .kA . I02 .kA .
In1 .kA . In2 .kA .
Ia3 .kA .
Ib3 .kA .
Ic3 .kA .
I13 .kA .
I23 .kA .
I03 .kA .
In3 .kA .
V .kV .
Ida .pu Id01.pu
Idb .pu Id02.pu
Idc .pu Id03.pu
T HM    .  %
Frequency .Hz

Ia, Ib, Ic for phase current
I1, I2, I0 for symmetrical component current
Ida, Idb, Idc for differential current
Ido1, Ido2, Ido3 for zero-phase differential current in 1REF, 2REF, 3REF
Metering data is expressed as primary values or secondary values depending on the setting. For
setting, see Section 4.2.6.6.
 87 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
4.2.4.2 Displaying the Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs

To display the binary input and output status, do the following:
 Select 2 (= Binary I/O) to display the binary input and output status. (Binary inputs and
outputs depend oh the relay model.)
/2 Bin a ry input & output 3/ 5

Input ( IO#1) [00 0 000 000 000 ]
Input ( IO#2) [00 0 ]
Output ( IO# 1-trip ) [000 00 ]
Output(IO# 2) [000 000 000 000 00 ]
Output(IO# 3) [000 000 000 0 ]
The display format is shown below.
[              ]
Input (IO#1) BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 — — —
Input (IO#2) BI14 BI15 BI16 — — — — — — — — — — — —
Output (IO#1-trip) TP-1 TP-2 TP-3 TP-4 TP-5 — — — — — — — — — —
Output (IO#2) BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 BO11 BO12 FAIL BO13 —
Output (IO#3) BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 — — — — —
Lines 1 and 2 show the binary input status. BI1 to BI16 corresponds to each binary input signal.
For details of the binary input signals, see Appendix G. The status is expressed with logical level
"1" or "0" at the photo-coupler output circuit. IO#1 and IO#2 in the table indicates the name of the
module containing the binary input circuits.
Lines 3 to 5 show the binary output status. TP-1 to TP-5 of line 3 corresponding to the tripping
command outputs. Models 103, 203 and 204 are not provided with TP-4 and TP-5. FAIL of line 4
corresponds to the relay failure output. Other outputs expressed with BO1 to BO13 are
configurable. The status of these outputs is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at the input
circuit of the output relay driver. That is, the output relay is energized when the status is "1".
IO#1 to IO#3 in the table indicate the names of the module containing the binary output relays.
To display all the lines, press the and keys.
 88 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
4.2.4.3 Displaying the Status of Measuring Elements

To display the status of the measuring elements on the LCD, do the following:
 Select 3 (= Relay element) to display the status of the relay elements.
/2 Relay element 3/ 9
DIFT [00 0 000 000 000 ]
REF [00 0 ]
OC [00 0 000 000 ]
OCI [00 0 000 000 ]
EF [00 0 ]
E FI [00 0 ]
T HR [00 ]
V /F [00 0 ]
F RQ [000 0 ]
The display format is as shown below.

[              ]
A B C A B C A B C A B C — — —
DIFT
DIF 2f 5f HOC
REF 1 2 3 — — — — — — — — — — — —
A B C A B C A B C — — — — — —
OC
1OC 2OC 3OC
A B C A B C A B C — — — — — —
OCI
1OCI 2OCI 3OCI
EF 1 2 3 — — — — — — — — — — — —
EFI 1 2 3 — — — — — — — — — — — —
THR S A — — — — — — — — — — — — —
V/F H T A — — — — — — — — — — — —
FRQ L1 L2 H1 H2 — — — — — — — — — — —
Line 1 shows the operation status of current differential elements. Line 2 shows the status of
restricted earth fault elements. Line 3 shows the status of overcurrent elements. Line 4 shows the
status of time overcurrent elements. Line 5 shows the status of the overcurrent element for earth
fault. Line 6 shows the status of time overcurrent elements for earth fault. Lines 7, 8 and 9 show
the status of thermal overload element, overexcitation element and frequency element
respectively.
The status of each element is expressed with logical level "1" or "0". Status "1" means the element
is in operation.
To display all the lines on the LCD, press the and keys.
 89 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
4.2.4.4 Displaying the Status of the Time Synchronization Source

The internal clock of the GRT100 can be synchronized with external clocks such as the IRIG-B
time standard signal clock, RSM (relay setting and monitoring system) clock, or IEC60870-5-103.
To display on the LCD whether these clocks are active or inactive and which clock the relay is
synchronized with, do the following:
 Select 4 (= Time sync source) to display the status of time synchronization sources.
/ 2 T i m e s y n c h r o n i z a ti o n s o u r c e 1/ 3
*IRIG: Active
RSM: I na ct i v e
IEC: I na c t iv e
The asterisk on the far left shows that the internal clock is synchronized with the marked source
clock. If the marked source clock is inactive, the internal clock runs locally.
For details of the setting time synchronization, see Section 4.2.6.6.
4.2.4.5 Adjusting the Time

To adjust the clock when the internal clock is running locally, do the following:
 Select 5 (= Clock adjustment) to display the setting screen.
/2 12/Feb /1998 22:56:19 [local] 1/ 5
Minute( 0- 59): 41
Hour ( 0- 23): 22
Day ( 1- 31): 12
Month ( 1- 12): 2
Year ( 1990- 2089): 1998
Line 1 shows the current date, time and time synchronization source with which the internal clock
is synchronized. The time can be adjusted only when [Local] is indicated on the top line, showing
that the clock is running locally. When [IRIG] or [RSM] or [IEC] is indicated, the following
adjustment is invalid.
 Enter a numerical value within the specified range for each item and press the ENTER key.
 Press the END key to adjust the internal clock to the set hours without fractions and return to
the previous screen.
If a date which does not exist in the calendar is set and END is pressed, "Error: Incorrect date" is
displayed on the top line and the adjustment is discarded. Adjust again.
 90 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
4.2.5 Viewing the Settings
The sub-menu "Setting (view)" is used to view the settings made using the sub-menu "Setting
(change)" except for the relay version.
The following items are displayed:
Relay version
Description
Communication (Relay address and baud rate in the RSM or IEC60870-5-103)
Recording setting
Status setting
Protection setting
Binary input setting
Binary output setting
LED setting
Enter a number on the LCD to display each item as described in the previous sections.
4.2.5.1 Relay Version

To view the relay version, do the following.
 Press 3 (= Setting (view)) on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Setting (view)" screen.
/1 Setting(view)
1=Version 2=Description 3=Comm.
4=Record 5=Status 6=Protection
7=Binary input 8=Binary output 9=LED
 Press 1 (= Version) on the "Setting (view)" screen and the "Relay version" screen appears.
/2 Rela y version
Serial No.:
Main software:
PLC data:
IEC103 data:
4.2.5.2 Settings
The "Description", "Comm.", "Record", "Status", "Protection", "Binary input", "Binary output"
and "LED" screens display the current settings input using the "Setting (change)" sub-menu.
4.2.6 Changing the Settings
The "Setting (change)" sub-menu is used to make or change settings for the following items:
Password
Description
Communication (Relay address and baud rate in the RSM or IEC60870-5-103)
Recording
 91 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Status
Protection
Binary input
Binary output
LED
All of the above settings except the password can be seen using the "Setting (view)" sub-menu.
4.2.6.1 Setting Method

There are three setting methods as follows.
- To enter a selective number
- To enter numerical values
- To enter a text string
To enter a selected number

If a screen as shown below is displayed, perform setting as follows.
The number to the left of the cursor shows the current setting or default setting set at shipment.
The cursor can be moved to upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the and keys.
If setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the and keys.
/6 S c h e me s wi t c h 1/ 
D I F T P M D 1 = 3 P OR 2 = 2 P A ND 1 _
1R E F 1=1I 0 2=2I 0 3=3I 0 1
2R E F 1=1I 0 2=2I 0 3=3I 0 1
3R E F 1=1I 0 2=2I 0 3=3I 0 1
M 1O C I 1=Long 2 = St d 3 = Ve r y 4 = Ex t 1
M 1E F I 1=Long 2 = St d 3 = Ve r y 4 = Ex t 1
L/O 0 = Of f 1=On 1
2F - L O C K 0 = Of f 1 = On 1
5F - L O C K 0 = Of f 1 = On 1
D I F1 0 = Of f 1 = On 1
D I F2 0 = Of f 1 = On 1
D I F3 0 = Of f 1 = On 1
D I F4 0 = Of f 1 = On 1
D I F5 0 = Of f 1 = On 1
1R E F 1 0 = Of f 1 = On 1
1R E F 2 0 = Of f 1 = On 1
1R E F 3 0 = Of f 1 = On 1
1R E F 4 0 = Of f 1 = On 1
1R E F 5 0 = Of f 1 = On 1
: : :
 Move the cursor to a setting line.
 Enter the selected number. (Numbers other than those displayed cannot be entered.)
 92 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
 Press the ENTER key to confirm the entry and the cursor will move to the next line below.
(On the lowest line, the entered number blinks.)
 After completing the setting on the screen, press the END key to return to the upper menu.
To correct the entered number, do the following.
 If it is before pressing the ENTER key, press the CANCEL key and enter the new number.
 If it is after pressing the ENTER key, move the cursor to the correct line by pressing the
and keys and enter the new number.
Note: If the CANCEL key is pressed after any entry is confirmed by pressing the ENTER key, all
the entries performed so far on the screen concerned are canceled and screen returns to the upper
one.
When the screen shown below is displayed, perform setting as follows.

The number to the right of "Current No. = " shows the current setting.
/3 Change active group(Active group= *)
1 =G roup1 2=G roup2 3=G roup3 4=G roup4
5=G roup5 6=G roup6 7=G roup7 8=G roup8
Current No.= * Select No. =
 Enter a number to the right of "Select No. = ". (Numbers other than those displayed cannot be
entered.)
 Press the ENTER key to confirm the entry and the entered number blinks.
 After completing the setting on the screen, press the END key to return to the upper screen.
To correct the entered number, do the following.
 If it is before pressing the ENTER key, press the CANCEL key and enter the new number.
 If it is after pressing the ENTER key, enter the new number.
To enter numerical values

When the screen shown below is displayed, perform setting as follows:
The number to the left of the cursor shows the current setting or default setting set at shipment.
The cursor can be moved to upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the and keys.
If setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the and keys.
/6 VT & CT r atio 1 /7
1CT ( 1 - 2 0 00 0 )： 2 000
2CT ( 1 - 2 0 00 0 )： 1 000
3C T ( 1 - 20 000 )： 400
1nCT ( 1 - 20 000 )： 100
2n CT ( 1 - 20 000 )： 100
3n CT ( 1 - 20 000 )： 100
VT ( 1 - 20 000 )： 400
 Move the cursor to a setting line.
 Enter the numerical value.
 Press the ENTER key to confirm the entry and the cursor will move to the next line below.
 93 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
(If a numerical value outside the displayed range is entered, "Error: Out of range" appears on
the top line and the cursor remains on the line. Press the CANCEL key to clear the entry.)
 After completing the setting on the screen, press the END key to return to the upper screen.
To correct the entered numerical value, do the following.
 If it is before pressing the ENTER key, press the CANCEL key and enter the new
numerical value.
 If it is after pressing the ENTER key, move the cursor to the correct line by pressing the
and keys and enter the new numerical value.
Note: If the CANCEL key is pressed after any entry is confirmed by pressing the ENTER key, all
the entries made so far on the screen concerned are canceled and the screen returns to the upper
one.
To enter a text string

Text strings are entered in the bracket under the "Plant name" or "Description" screen.
To select a character, use keys 2, 4, 6 and 8 to move the blinking cursor down, left, right and up. "
" and "" on each of lines 2 to 4 indicate a space and backspace, respectively. A maximum of
22 characters can be entered within the brackets.
/3 Plant name [ _ ]
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ ()[]@_ 
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz { } * / + - < = > 
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ! ”# $ % & ’：；，．^ ` 
 Set the cursor position in the bracket by selecting "" or "" and pressing the ENTER key.
 Move the blinking cursor to select a character.

 Press the ENTER to enter the blinking character at the cursor position in the brackets.
 Press the END key to confirm the entry and return to the upper screen.
To correct the entered character, do either of the following.
 Discard the character by selecting "" and pressing the ENTER key and enter the new
character.
 Discard the whole entry by pressing the CANCEL key and restart the entry from the first.
To complete the setting

Enter after making entries on each setting screen by pressing the ENTER key, the new settings
are not yet used for operation, though stored in the memory. To validate the new settings, take the
following steps.
 Press the END key to the upper screen. Repeat this until the confirmation screen shown
below is displayed. The confirmation screen is displayed just before returning to the "Setting
(change)" sub-menu.
 94 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
/2 **************
Change settings?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
 When the screen is displayed, press the ENTER key to start operation using the new settings,
or press the CANCEL key to correct or cancel entries. In the latter case, the screen turns
back to the setting screen to enable re-entries. Press the CANCEL key to cancel entries made
so far and to turn to the "Setting (change)" sub-menu.
4.2.6.2 Password
For the sake of security of changing the settings, password protection can be set as follows;
 Press 4 (= Setting (change)) on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Setting (change)"
screen.
/1 Setting(change )
1=Password 2=Description 3=RSM comm
 Press 1 (= Password) to display the "Password" screen.
/2 Password
Input new password [ ]
Retype new password [ ]
 Enter a 4-digit number within the brackets after "Input new password" and press the ENTER
key.
 For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the brackets after "Retype new password"
and press the ENTER key.
 Press the END key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different from
that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password" screen
before returning to the upper screen.
"Mismatch-password unchanged."
Re-entry is then requested.
Password trap
After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting change
screens.
If 4 (= Setting (change)) is entered on the top "MENU" screen, the password trap screen
"Password" is displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the
"Setting (change)" sub-menu screens.
Password
Input password [ ]
 95 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Canceling or changing the password

To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen.
The "Setting (change)" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.
The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in the
same way as the first password setting.
If you forget the password

Press CANCEL and RESET together for one second on the top "MENU" screen. The screen
disappears, and the password protection of the GRT100 is canceled. Set the password again.
4.2.6.3 Description
To enter the plant name and other data, do the following. These data are attached to records.
screen.
 Press 2 (= Description) to display the "Description" screen.
/2 D es cri ption
1 =P l an t na me 2=De s cr i ption
 To enter the plant name, select 1 (= Plant name) on the "Description" screen.
/3 Plant name [ _ ]
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ! ” # $ % & ’ ：；，．^ ` 
To enter special items, select 2 (= Description) on the "Description" screen.

/3 Description [ _ ]
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ! ” # $ % & ’ ：；，．^ ` 
 Enter the text string.
4.2.6.4 Communication
If the relay is linked with RSM (relay setting and monitoring system) or IEC60870-5-103, the
relay address must be set. Do this as follows:
screen.
 Press 3 (= Comm.) to display the "Communication" screen.
/2 Communicat i on
1 =A ddress
2 =S witch
 Press 1 (= Address) to enter the relay address number.
 96 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
/3 Address 1/2
H DL C ( 1- 32): 1_
I EC ( 0- 254): 2
 Enter the address number on "HDLC" column for RSM and "IEC" column for
IEC60870-5-103 and press the ENTER key.
CAUTION: Do not overlap the relay address number.

 Press 2 (= Switch) on the "Communication" screen to select the protocol and transmission
speed (baud rate), etc., of the RSM or IEC60870-5-103.
/3 Switch 1 /3
232C 1=9.6 2=19.2 3=38.4 4=57.6 1
IECBR 1=9.6 2=19.2 2
IECBLK 1=Normal 2=Blocked 1
 Select the number corresponding to the system and press the ENTER key.
<232C>
This line is to select the RS-232C baud rate when the RSM system applied.
Note: The default setting of the 232C is 9.6kbps. The 57.6kbps setting, if possible, is recommended to
serve user for comfortable operation. The setting of RSM100 is also set to the same baud rate.
<IECBR>
This line is to select the baud rate when the IEC60870-5-103 system applied.
<IECBLK>
Select 2 (=Blocked) to block the monitor direction in the IEC60870-5-103 communication.
When using the IEC60870-5-103 communication, set to 1 (=Normal).
4.2.6.5 Setting the Recording

To set the recording function as described in Section 4.2.3, do the following:
screen.
 Press 4 (= Record) to display the "Record" screen.
/2 Record
Setting the fault recording

 Press 1 (= Fault record) to display the "Fault record" screen.
/ 3 Fau lt record 1/ 1
Phase mode 1=Operating 2=Fault 1 _
 97 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
 Enter 1 or 2 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 1 (= Operating) to display the operating phase.
Enter 2 (= Fault) to display the fault phase.
Setting the event recording

 Press 2 (= Event record) to display the "Event record" screen.
/3 Event record 0=None 3= Both 1/16

1
M/ 3h
ec 2. Trip1 1=Operate 2=Reset 3_
Mech. Trip2 1=Operate 2=Reset 3
Mech. Trip3 1=Operate 2=Reset 3
 Enter 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 and press the ENTER key. Repeat this for all events.
Enter 0 (= None) not to record the event.
Enter 1 (= Operate) to record the event when the status changes to "operate".
Enter 2 (= Reset) to record the event when the status changes to "reset".
Enter 3 (= Both) to record the event when the status changes both to "operate" and "reset".
Setting the disturbance recording

 Press 3 (= Disturbance record) to display the "Disturbance record" screen.
/3 D i s t u r bance r e c o rd
1=Record time & starter
2=Sche me switch
 Press 1 (= Record time & starter) to display the "Record time & starter" screen.
/４ Record time & starter 1/5
Time ( 0.1- 3.0): 1.0 _ s
1OCPS( 0.10- 20.00): 1.00 pu
2OCPS( 0.10- 20.00): 1.00 pu
1OCPG( 0.05- 20.00): 1.00 pu
2OCPG( 0.10- 20.00): 1.00 pu
 Enter the recording time and starter element settings.
To set starters, do the following:

 Press 2 (= Scheme switch) on the "Disturbance record" screen to display the "Scheme switch"
screen.
/4 Sch eme swi t ch 1 / 14

TR I P 1 0 = O ff 1 =O n 1
TRI P 2 0=Off 1=On 1
TRI P3 0=Off 1=On 1
: : : 1
EVE N T 3 0=Off 1=On 1
 Enter 1 to use as a starter or enter 0 if not to use. Repeat this for all items.
 Enter the signal number to record binary signals in Appendix B.
 98 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
4.2.6.6 Status
To set the status display described in Section 4.2.4, do the following.
Press 5 (= Status) on the "Setting (change)" sub-menu to display the "Status" screen.
/2 Status
1=Metering
2=Time synchronization
3=Time zone
Setting the metering

 Press 1 (= Metering) to display the "Metering" screen.
/3 Metering 1/ 1
Display value 1=Primary 2=Secondary 1 _
 Enter the selected number and press the ENTER key. Repeat this for all items.
Setting the time synchronization

The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronized with the external IRIG-B time standard
signal, RSM or IEC clock. This is selected by setting as follows.
 Press 2 (= Time synchronization) to display the "Time synchronization" screen.
/3 Time synchronization 1/1

Sync 0=Off 1=IRIG 2=RSM 3=IEC 1 _
 Enter the selected number and press the ENTER key.

Note: When to select IRIG-B, RSM or IEC, check that they are active on the "Time synchronization
source" screen in "Status" sub-menu. If it is set to an inactive IRIG-B, RSM or IEC, the calendar
clock runs locally.
Setting the time zone

When the calendar clock is synchronized with the IRIG-B time standard signal, it is possible to
transfer GMT to the local time.
 Press 3 (= Time zone) to display the "Time zone" screen.
/3 Time zone 1/1

GMT ( -12- +12): +9 _ hrs
 Enter the difference between GMT and local time and press the ENTER key.
4.2.6.7 Protection
The GRT100 can have 8 setting groups for protection according to the change of power system
operation, one of which is assigned to be active. To set protection, do the following:
 99 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
 Press 6 (= Protection) on the "Setting (change)" screen to display the "Protection" screen.
/2 Protection
1=Change active group
2=Change setting
3=Copy group
Changing the active group

 Press 1 (= Change active group) to display the "Change active group" screen.
/3 Change active group(Active group= *)
1 =Group1 2 =Group2 3 =Group3 4 =Group4
Current No.= * Select No. =
 Enter the selected number and press the ENTER key.
Changing the settings

Almost all the setting items have default values that are set when the product GRT100 was
shipped. For the default values, see Appendix D and H. To change the settings, do the following:
 Press 2 (= Change setting) to display the "Change setting" screen.
/3 Change setting (Active group= *)

 Press the group number to change the settings and display the "Protection" screen.
/4 Protection (Group *)
1=Transformer parameter
2=Trip
Settings are required for transformer parameter and protection functions.
Setting the transformer parameters

Enter the VT&CT ratio as follows:
 Press 1 (= Transformer parameter) on the "Protection" screen to display the "Transformer
parameter" screen.
/5 Tran sfor mer parameter (Group *)
1=VT & CT ratio
 Press 1 (VT&CT ratio) to display the "VT&CT ratio" screen.
 100 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
/6 VT & CT r atio 1 /7
1CT ( 1 - 2 0 00 0 )： 2 000
2CT ( 1 - 2 0 00 0 )： 1 000
3C T ( 1 - 20 000 )： 400
1nCT ( 1 - 20 000 )： 100
2n CT ( 1 - 20 000 )： 100
3n CT ( 1 - 20 000 )： 100
VT ( 1 - 20 000 )： 400
 Enter the VT ratio and press the ENTER key.

 Enter the CT ratio and press the ENTER key.
CAUTION
Do not set the CT primary rated current. Set the CT ratio.
(CT ratio) = (CT primary rated current [A]) / (Relay rated current [A])
 Press the END key to return the display to the "Transformer parameter" screen.
Setting the protection function

To set the protection schemes, scheme switches and protection elements, do the following.
Protection elements are measuring elements and timers.
Note: Depending on the selected protection scheme and scheme switch setting, some of the scheme
switches and protection elements are not used and so need not be set. The protection function
setting menu of the GRT100 does not display unnecessary setting items. Therefore, start by
setting the protection scheme, then set the scheme switch, then the protection elements.
As a result of the above, note that some of the setting items described below may not appear in
the actual setting.
 Press 2 (= Trip) on the "Protection" screen to display the "Trip" screen.
/5 Trip (Group *)
1=Scheme switch
2=Protection element
Setting the scheme switch

 Press 1 (= Scheme switch) to display the "Scheme switch" screen.
 101 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
/6 S c h e me s wi t c h 1/ 
D I F T P M D 1 = 3 P OR 2=1P 1 _
1R E F 1=1I 0 2=2I 0 3=3I 0 1
2R E F 1=1I 0 2=2I 0 3=3I 0 1
3R E F 1=1I 0 2=2I 0 3=3I 0 1
L/O 0 = Of f 1=On 1
2F - L O C K 0 = Of f 1 = On 1
5F - L O C K 0 = Of f 1 = On 1
D I F1 0 = Of f 1 = On 1
D I F2 0 = Of f 1 = On 1
D I F3 0 = Of f 1 = On 1
: : :
M .T 4 - 1 0 = Of f 1 = On 1
M .T 4 - 2 0 = Of f 1 = On 1
M .T 4 - 3 0 = Of f 1 = On 1
: : :
SVCNT 0 = A L M&BLK 1 = A LM 1
CTSEN 0 = Of f 1 = On 1
 Enter the number corresponding to the switch status to be set and press the ENTER key for
each switch.
The setting of REF depends on the type of the transformer. The setting method is shown in
Appendix L.
 After setting all switches, press the END key to return to the "Trip" screen.
Setting the protection elements

 Press 2 (= Protection element) on the "Trip" screen to display the "Protection element" screen.
/6 Protec tion element (Group= *)

1=DIFT 2=REF 3=OC
4=THR 5=V/F 6=FRQ
<DIFT>
 Press 1 (= DIFT) to display the "DIFT" screen. The measuring elements used in the current
differential protection are set using this screen.
 Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key for each element.
 After setting all elements, press the END key to return to the "Protection element" menu.
 102 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
/7 DIFT 1/15
ik ( 0.10- 1 .00): 0.10 pu
p1 ( 10- 100): 10 %
p2 ( 10- 200): 100 %
kp ( 1.00- 20 .00): 1.00 pu
kct1 ( 0.05- 50 .00): 1.00
kct2 ( 0.05- 50 .00): 1.50
kct3 ( 0.05- 50 .00): 2.00
yd_p ( 1- 2): 1
yd _s ( 1- 2): 1
v e c_ s ( 1- 11): 0
y d _t ( 1- 2): 1
v e c_ t ( 1- 11): 0
k2f ( 10- 50): 10 %
k5f ( 10- 1 00): 50 %
kh ( 2.00- 20 .00): 2.00 pu
<REF>
 Press 2 (= REF) to display the "REF" screen. The measuring elements and timers used in the
restricted earth fault protection are set using this screen.
/7 REF 1/21
1ik ( 0.05- 0 .50): 0.05 pu
1kct1( 1.00- 50.00): 1.00
1kct2( 1.00- 50.00): 1 .00
1kct3( 1.00 - 50 .00 ) : 1 .00
1p2 ( 50 - 100 ) : 50 %
1kp ( 0.50 - 2 .00 ) : 1.00 pu
2ik ( 0.05 - 0 .50 ) : 0.50 pu
2kct1( 1.00 - 50 .00 ) : 1.00
2kct2( 1.00 - 50 .00 ) : 1.00
2kct3( 1.00 - 50 .00 ) : 1 .00
2p2 ( 50 - 100 ) : 50 %
2kp ( 0.50 - 2 .00 ) : 1.00 pu
3ik ( 0.05 - 0 .50 ) : 0.50 pu
3kct1( 1.00 - 50 .00 ) : 1.00
3kct2( 1.00 - 50 .00 ) : 1.00
3kct3( 1.00 - 50 .00 ) : 1 .00
3p2 ( 50 - 100 ) : 50 %
3kp ( 0.50 - 2 .00 ) : 1.00 pu
T1REF( 0.00 - 10 .00 ) : 0.01 s
T2REF( 0.00 - 10 .00 ) : 0.01 s
T3REF( 0.00 - 10 .00 ) : 0.01 s
<OC>
 Press 3 (OC) to display the "OC" screen. The overcurrent elements and timers are set using
this screen.
 103 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
/7 OC 1/24
1O C ( 0.10- 20.00): 0.10 pu
2O C ( 0.10- 20.00): 0.10 pu
3O C ( 0.10- 20.00): 0.10 pu
T1OC ( 0 . 0 0- 10.00): 0.00 s
T2OC ( 0 . 0 0- 10.00): 0.00 s
T3OC ( 0 . 0 0- 10.00): 0.00 s
1OCI ( 0 . 1 0- 5.00): 0.10 pu
2OCI ( 0 . 1 0- 5.00): 0.10 pu
3OCI ( 0 . 1 0- 5.00): 0.10 pu
T1OCI ( 0 . 0 5- 1.00): 0.50
T2OCI ( 0 . 0 5- 1.00): 0.50
T3OCI ( 0 . 0 5- 1.00): 0.50
1EF ( 0 . 1 0- 2 0 . 0 0 ): 0.10 pu
2EF ( 0 . 1 0- 2 0 . 0 0 ): 0.10 pu
3EF ( 0 . 1 0- 2 0 . 0 0 ): 0.10 pu
T1EF ( 0 . 0 0- 10.00): 0.00 s
T2EF ( 0 . 0 0- 10.00): 0.00 s
T3EF ( 0 . 0 0- 10.00): 0.00 s
1EFI ( 0 . 1 0- 5 . 0 0 ): 0.10 pu
2EFI ( 0 . 1 0- 5 . 0 0 ): 0.10 pu
3EFI ( 0 . 1 0- 5 . 0 0 ): 0.10 pu
T1EFI ( 0 . 0 5- 1 . 0 0 ): 0.50
T2EFI ( 0 . 0 5- 1 . 0 0 ): 0.50
T3EFI ( 0 . 0 5- 1 . 0 0 ): 0.50
<THR>
 Press 4 (= THR) to display the "THR" screen. The measuring elements and the timer used in
the thermal overload protection are set using this screen.
/7 THR 1/ 5
 ( 0.5- 50 0 . 0 ) : 0.5 min
k ( 0.10- 4.00): 0.10
IB ( 0.50- 2.50): 0 .50 pu
Ip ( 0.00- 1 .00): 0.50 pu
TA ( 0- 10): 0 min
<V/F>
 Press 5 (= V/F) to display the “V/F” screen. The measuring elements and timers used in the
overexcitation protection are set using this screen.
 After setting all elements, press the END key to return to the “Protection element” menu.
 104 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
/7 V/F 1/ 9
V ( 10 0 . 0 - 12 0 . 0 ): 100.0 V
A ( 1.03- 1.30): 1.10 pu
L ( 1.05- 1.30): 1 .20 pu
H ( 1.10 - 1 . 4 0 ) : 1.30 pu
L T ( 1 - 6 0 0 ) : 1 s
H T ( 1 - 6 0 0 ) : 1 s
R T ( 60 - 3 6 0 0 ) : 60 s
T VFH ( 1 - 6 0 0 ) : 1 s
T VFA ( 1 - 6 0 0 ) : 1 s
<FRQ>
 Press 6 (= FRQ) to display the “FRQ” screen. The measuring elements and timers used in the
frequency protection are set using this screen.
 After setting all elements, press the END key to return to the “Protection element” menu.
/7 FR Q 1/ 6
81-1 ( 45 . 0 0 - 55 .00): 45.00 Hz
81-2 ( 45 . 0 0 - 55 . 0 0 ) : 45.00 Hz
UV ( 40- 100): 40 V
TFRQL( 0.00- 60 . 0 0 ) : 0.00 s
TFRQH( 0.00- 60 . 0 0 ) : 0.00 s
TFRQA( 0.00- 60 . 0 0 ) : 0.00 s
Setting group copy

To copy the settings of one group and overwrite them to another group, do the following:
 Press 3 (= Copy group) on the "Protection" screen to display the "Copy group A to B" screen.
/3 Copy group A to B (Active group= *)

A ( 1- 8)：
B ( 1- 8)：
 Enter the group number to be copied in line A and press the ENTER key.
 Enter the group number to be overwritten by the copy in line B and press the ENTER key.
4.2.6.8 Binary Input

The logic level of binary input signals can be inverted by setting before entering the scheme logic.
Inversion is used when the input contact cannot meet the conditions described in Table 3.2.2.
 Press 7 (= Binary input) on the "Setting (change)" sub-menu to display the "Binary input"
screen.
 105 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
/2 Binary input 1=Norm 2=Inv 1 /15

BISW 1 1
BISW 2 1
BISW 3 1
BISW 4 1
BISW 5 1
: :
B I S W 14 1
B I S W 15 1
B I S W 16 1
 Enter 1 (= Normal) or 2 (= Inverted) and press the ENTER key for each binary input.
4.2.6.9 Binary Output

All the binary outputs of the GRT100 except the tripping command, and the relay failure signal
are user-configurable. It is possible to assign one signal or up to six ANDing or ORing signals to
one output relay. Available signals are listed in Appendix B.
It is also possible to attach a drop-off delay time of 0.2 seconds to these signals. The drop-off
delay time is disabled by the scheme switch [BOTD].
Appendix D shows the factory default settings.
To configure the binary output signals, do the following:
Selection of output module

 Press 8 (= Binary output) on the "Setting (change)" screen to display the "Binary output"
screen. The available output module(s) will be shown.
/2 Binary output
1 =IO# 2 2 =IO#3
 Press the number corresponding to the selected output module to display the "Binary output"
screen.
/3 Binary output (IO2)
Select BO ( 1- 13)
Select No.=
Note: The setting is required for all the binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not to be used,
enter 0 for the logic gates #1 to #6 when assign signals.
Selecting the output relay

 Enter the output relay number and press the ENTER key to display the "Setting" screen.
/4 Setting (BO1 of IO2)

1=Logic gate type & delay timer
2=Input to logic gate
 106 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Setting the logic gate type and timer

 Press 1 to display the "Logic gate type and delay timer" screen.
/5 Logic gate type & delay timer 1/ 2

Logic 1=OR 2=AND 1
BOTD 0=Off 1=On 1
 Enter 1 or 2 to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.
 Enter 0 or 1 to add 0.2s drop-off delay time to the output relay or not and press the ENTER
key.
 Press the END key to return to the "Setting" screen.
Assigning signals
 Press 2 on the "Setting" screen to display the "Input to logic gate" screen.
/5 Input to logic g a te 1/ 6
In #1 ( 0- 307 1 ) : 21
In #2 ( 0- 307 1 ) : 4
In #3 ( 0- 307 1 ) : 67
In #4 ( 0- 3071 ): 0
In #5 ( 0- 3071 ): 0
In #6 ( 0- 3071 ): 0
 Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #6) by entering the number corresponding to each signal
referring to Appendix B.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #6, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).
Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.
4.2.6.10 LEDs
Four LEDs from bottom of the front panel are user-configurable. One of the signals listed in
Appendix B can be assigned to each LED as follows:
 Press 9 (= LED) on the "Setting (change)" screen to display the "LED" screen.
/2 LED 1/ 4
LED1 ( 0- 3071 ): 21
LED2 ( 0- 3071): 4
LED3 ( 0- 3071): 67
LED4 ( 0- 3071): 0
 Enter the number corresponding to a signal to assign signals to each LED.

If an LED is not used, enter "0" or the default value will be assigned.
4.2.7 Testing
The sub-menu "Test" provides such functions as setting of testing switches, forced operation of
binary outputs, time measurement of the variable setting timer and logic signal observation.
 107 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
4.2.7.1 Setting the switches

The automatic monitor function (A.M.F.) can be disabled by setting the switch [A.M.F] to "OFF".
Disabling the A.M.F. prevents tripping from being blocked even in the event of a failure in the
items being monitored by this function. It also prevents failures from being displayed on the
"ALARM" LED and LCD described in Section 4.2.1. No events related to A.M.F. are recorded,
either.
Disabling A.M.F. is useful for blocking the output of unnecessary alarms during testing.
Note: Set the switch [A.M.F] to "Off" before applying the test inputs, when the A.M.F is disabled.
The switch [Reset] is used to test the THR and V/F elements. When the switch [Reset] is set to
"1", the time counting of inverse time characteristic can be forcibly reset.
While the switch [A.M.F] is set to "0" or [Reset] is set to "1", the red "TESTING" LED is lit for
alarm purposes.
Caution: Be sure to restore these switches after the tests are completed.
Disabling automatic monitoring

 Press 5 (= Test) on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen.
/1 Test
1=Switch 2=Binary output
3=Timer 4=Logic circuit
 Press 1 (= Switch) to display the "Switch" screen.
/2 Switch 1/ 3
A.M.F. 0=Off 1=On 1
Reset 0=Off 1=On 0
IECTST 0=Off 1=On 1
 Enter 0 for A.M.F to disable the A.M.F. and press the ENTER key.
 Enter 1(=On) for IECTST to transmit ‘test mode’ to the control system by IEC60870-5-103
communication when testing the local relay, and press the ENTER key.
 Press the END key to return to the "Test" screen.
Resetting the time counting of THR and V/F elements

 Enter 1 for Reset to reset the time counting forcibly and press the ENTER key.
 Press the END key to return to the "Test" screen.
4.2.7.2 Binary Output Relay

It is possible to forcibly operate all binary output relays for checking connections with the
external devices. Forced operation can be performed on one or more binary outputs at a time for
each module.
 Press 2 (= Binary output) on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary output" screen.
 108 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
/2 Binary output
1=IO#1 2 =IO#2 3 =IO#3
The LCD displays the output modules mounted depending on the model.
 Enter the selected number corresponding to each module to be operated. Then the LCD
displays the name of the module, the name of the output relay, the name of the terminal block
and the terminal number to which the relay contact is connected.
/3 BO (0 =Disable 1=Enable) 1 /14
IO# 2 BO1 1
IO# 2 BO2 1
IO# 2 BO3 1
IO# 2 B O4 0
IO# 2 B O5 0
IO# 2 B O6 0
IO# 2 B O7 0
IO# 2 B O8 0
IO# 2 B O9 0
IO# 2 B O10 0
IO# 2 B O11 0
IO# 2 B O12 0
IO# 2 F AIL 0
IO# 2 BO13 0
 Enter 1 and press the ENTER key.
 After completing the entries, press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown
below.
/3 BO
Keep pressing 1 to operate.
Press CANCEL to cancel.
 Keep pressing 1 key to operate the output relays forcibly.

 Release the press of 1 key to reset the operation.
4.2.7.3 Timer
The pick-up or drop-off delay time of the variable timer used in the scheme logic can be measured
with monitoring jacks A and B. Monitoring jacks A and B are used to observe the input signal and
output signal to the timer respectively.
 Press 3 (= Timer) on the "Test" screen to display the "Timer" screen.
/2 Timer 1/ 1
Timer( 1- 15)： 1
 Enter the number corresponding to the timer to be observed and press the ENTER key. The
 109 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
timers and related numbers are listed in Appendix C.

 Press the END key to display the following screen.
/2 Timer
Press ENTER to operate.
 Press the ENTER key to operate the timer. The "TESTING" LED turns on, and timer is
initiated and the following display appears. The input and output signals of the timer can be
observed at monitoring jacks A and B respectively. The LEDs above monitoring jacks A or B
are also lit if the input or output signal exists.
/2 Tim e r
Operat i ng...
Press E ND to reset.
Press C ANCEL to cancel.
 Press the END key to reset the input signal to the timer. The "TESTING" LED turns off.
 Press the CANCEL key to test other timers. Repeat the above testing.
4.2.7.4 Logic Circuit

It is possible to observe the binary signal level on the signals listed in Appendix B with
monitoring jacks A and B.
 Press 4 (= Logic circuit) on the "Test" screen to display the "Logic circuit" screen.
/2 Logic circuit 1/ 2
TermA( 0- 3071): 1
TermB( 0- 3071 ): 48
 Enter a signal number to be observed at monitoring jack A and press the ENTER key.
 Enter the other signal number to be observed at monitoring jack B and press the ENTER key.
After completing the setting, the signals can be observed by the binary logic level at monitoring
jacks A and B or by the LEDs above the jacks.
On screens other than the above screen, observation with the monitoring jacks is disabled.
 110 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
4.3 Personal Computer Interface

The relay can be operated from a personal computer using an RS-232C port on the front panel.
On the personal computer, the following analysis and display of the fault voltage and current are
available in addition to the items available on the LCD screen.
 Display of voltage and current waveform: Oscillograph, vector display
 Symmetrical component analysis: On arbitrary time span
 Harmonic analysis: On arbitrary time span
 Frequency analysis: On arbitrary time span
For the details, see the separate instruction manual "PC INTERFACE RSM100".
4.4 Relay Setting and Monitoring System

The Relay Setting and Monitoring (RSM) system is a system that retrieves and analyses the data
on power system quantities, fault and event records and views or changes settings in individual
relays via a telecommunication network using a remote PC.
Figure 4.4.1 shows the typical configuration of the RSM system via a protocol converter G1PR2.
The relays are connected through twisted pair cables, and the maximum 256 relays can be
connected since the G1PR2 can provide up to 8 ports. The total length of twisted pair wires should
not exceed 1200 m. Relays are mutually connected using an RS485 port on the relay rear panel
and connected to a PC RS232C port via G1PR2. Terminal resistor (150 ohms) is connected the
last relay. The transmission rate used is 64 kbits/s.
Figure 4.4.2 shows the configuration of the RSM system with Ethernet LAN (option). The relays
are connected to HUB through UTP cable using RJ-45 connector at the rear of the relay. The relay
recognizes the transmission speed automatically.
In case of the optional fiber optic interface (option), the relays are connected through
graded-index multi-mode 50/125m or 62.5/125m type optical fiber using ST connector at the
rear of the relay.
Twisted paired
cable
G1PR2
Figure 4.4.1 Relay Setting and Monitoring System (1)
 111 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
UTP cable
(10Base-T)
214B-13-10
100/110/115/120V
Other
HUB. relays
PC Relay
Figure 4.4.2 Relay Setting and Monitoring System (2)
4.5 IEC 60870-5-103 Interface

The GRT100 can support the IEC60870-5-103 communication protocol. This protocol is mainly
used when the relay communicates with a control system and is used to transfer the following
measurand, status data and general command from the relay to the control system.
 Measurand data: current, voltage, frequency
 Status data: events, fault indications, etc.
The IEC60870-5-103 function in the relay can be customized with the original software “IEC103
configurater”. It runs on a personal computer (PC) connected to the relay, and can help setting of
Time-tagged messages, General command, Metering, etc. For detais of the setting method, refer
to “IEC103 configurater” manual. For the default setting of IEC60870-5-103, see Appendix O.
The protocol can be used through the RS485 port on the relay rear panel and can be also used
through the optional fibre optical interface. The relay connection is similar to Figure 4.4.1.
The relay supports two baud-rates 9.6kbps and 19.2kbps. The data transfer from the relay can be
blocked by the setting. For the settings, see the Section 4.2.6.4.
4.6 Clock Function

The clock function (Calendar clock) is used for time-tagging for the following purposes:
 Event records
 Disturbance records
 Fault records
 Metering
 Automatic supervision
 Display of the system quantities on the digest screen
 Display of the fault records on the digest screen
 Display of the automatic monitoring results on the digest screen
The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronized with the external IRIG-B time standard
signal, RSM or IEC clock. This can be selected by setting.
If it is necessary to synchronize with the IRIG-B time standard signal, it is possible to transform
GMT to the local time by setting.
When the relays are connected to the RSM system as shown in Figure 4.4.1, the calendar clock of
each relay is synchronized with the RSM clock. If the RSM clock is synchronized with the
external time standard (GPS clock etc.), then all the relay clocks are synchronized with the
external time standard.
 112 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
5. Installation
5.1 Receipt of Relays
When relays are received, carry out the acceptance inspection immediately. In particular, check
for damage during transportation, and if any is found, contact the vendor.
Check that the following accessories are attached.
 3 pins for the monitoring jack, packed in a plastic bag.
 An optional attachment kit required in rack-mounting. (See Appendix F.)
1 large bracket with 5 round head screws, spring washers and washers (M4×10)
1 small bracket with 3 countersunk head screws (M4×6)
2 bars with 4 countersunk head screws (M3×8)
Always store the relays in a clean, dry environment.
5.2 Relay Mounting

Either a rack or flush mounting relay is delivered as designated by the customer. The GRT100
models are housed into type A case. Appendix F shows the case outline.
If the customer requires a rack-mounting relay, support metal fittings necessary to mount it in the
19-inch rack are also supplied with the relay.
When mounting the relay in the rack, detach the original brackets fixed on both sides of the relay
and seals on the top and bottom of the relay. Attach the larger bracket and smaller bracket on the
left and right side of the relay respectively and the two bars on the top and bottom of the relay.
How to mount the attachment kit, see Appendix F.
Dimension of the attachment kit EP-101 is also shown in Appendix F.
5.3 Electrostatic Discharge

CAUTION
Do not take out any modules outside the relay case since electronic components on the modules
are very sensitive to electrostatic discharge. If it is absolutely essential to take the modules out of
the case, do not touch the electronic components and terminals with your bare hands.
Additionally, always put the module in a conductive anti-static bag when storing it.
5.4 Handling Precautions

A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potential of several thousand
volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits
can cause serious damage, which often may not be immediately apparent but the reliability of the
circuit will have been reduced.
The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case.
Do not expose them to risk of damage by withdrawing modules unnecessarily.
Each module incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor devices.
However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw a module, precautions should be taken to preserve
the high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed and manufactured.
 113 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
CAUTION
 Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as the
equipment by touching the case.
 Handle the module by its front plate, frame or edges of the printed circuit board. Avoid
touching the electronic components, printed circuit board or connectors.
 Do not pass the module to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same
electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.
 Place the module on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the same
potential as yourself.
 Do not place modules in polystyrene trays.
It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry should be carried
out in a Special Handling Area such as described in the IEC 60747.
5.5 External Connections

External connections are shown in Appendix G.
 114 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
6. Commissioning and Maintenance

6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests
The GRT100 is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored.
Commissioning tests can be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and
conjunctive tests. The function tests are at the user’s discretion.
In these tests, user interfaces on the front panel of the relay or local PC can be fully applied.
Test personnel must be familiar with general relay testing practices and safety precautions to
avoid personal injuries or equipment damage.
Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware defect.
Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by monitoring which
circuits function when the DC power is supplied.
User interfaces
Binary input circuits and output circuits
AC input circuits
Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based. Tests of the
protection schemes and fault locator require a dynamic test set.
Measuring elements
Timers
Metering and recording
Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other external
equipment.
The following tests are included in these tests:

On load test: phase sequence check and polarity check
Tripping circuit test
 115 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
6.2 Cautions
6.2.1 Safety Precautions
CAUTION
 The relay rack is provided with a grounding terminal.
Before starting the work, always make sure the relay rack is grounded.
 When connecting the cable to the back of the relay, firmly fix it to the terminal block and
attach the cover provided on top of it.
 Before checking the interior of the relay, be sure to turn off the power.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause electric shock or malfunction.
6.2.2 Cautions on Tests
CAUTION
 While the power is on, do not connect/disconnect the flat cable on the front of the printed
circuit board (PCB).
 While the power is on, do not mount/dismount the PCB.
 Before turning on the power, check the following:
- Make sure the polarity and voltage of the power supply are correct.
- Make sure the CT circuit is not open.
- Make sure the VT circuit is not short-circuited.
 Be careful that the transformer module is not damaged due to an overcurrent or overvoltage.
 If settings are changed for testing, remember to reset them to the original settings.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause damage or malfunction of the relay.
Before mounting/dismounting the PCB, take antistatic measures such as wearing an earthed
wristband.
 116 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
6.3 Preparations
Test equipment
The following test equipment is required for the commissioning tests.
1 Single-phase voltage source
2 Single-phase current sources
1 Variable-frequency source
1 Combined fundamental and 2nd-harmonic adjustable current supply
1 Combined fundamental and 5th-harmonic adjustable current supply
1 DC power supply
1 DC voltmeter
1 AC voltmeter
1 Phase angle meter
2 AC ammeters
1 Frequency meter
1 Time counter, precision timer
1 PC (not essential)
Relay settings
Before starting the tests, it must be specified whether the tests will use the user’s settings or the
default settings.
For the default settings, see the following appendixes:

Appendix D Binary Output Default Setting List
Appendix H Relay Setting Sheet
Visual inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the
internal module might also have been affected. Contact the vendor.
Relay ratings
Check that the items described on the nameplate on the front of the relay conform to the user’s
specification. The items are: relay type and model, AC voltage, current and frequency ratings, and
auxiliary DC supply voltage rating.
Local PC
When using a local PC, connect it with the relay via the RS-232C port on the front of the relay.
RSM100 software is required to run the PC.
 117 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
6.4 Hardware Tests

The tests can be performed without external wiring, but DC power supply and AC voltage and
current source are required.
6.4.1 User Interfaces
This test ensures that the LCD, LEDs and keys function correctly.
LCD display
 Apply the rated DC voltage and check that the LCD is off.
Note: If there is a failure, the LCD displays the "Auto-supervision" screen when the DC voltage is
applied.
 Press the RESET key for 1 second and check that black dots appear on the whole screen.
LED display
 Apply the rated DC voltage and check that the "IN SERVICE" LED is lit in green.
 Press the RESET key for 1 second and check that seven LEDs under the "IN SERVICE"
LED and two LEDs for monitoring jacks A and B are lit in red.
VIEW and RESET keys

 Press the VIEW key when the LCD is off and check that the "Metering" screen is displayed
on the LCD.
 Press the RESET key and check that the LCD turns off.
Keypad
 Press any key on the keypad when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the
"MENU" screen. Press the END key to turn off the LCD.
 Repeat this for all keys.
 118 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
6.4.2 Binary Input Circuit
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.1.
GRT100 GRT100
TB4 -B4
TB4 -A4
-A4 BI1
BI1 -B5
-B4 -A5 BI2
BI2
:
: :
:
:
: :
: -B10
-A10 BI12
BI13 -A10
-B11
TB3 -A14
TB3 -A14
BI14
BI14 -B14
-B14 BI15
BI15 -A15
-A15
-B15 BI16
BI16
-B15
DC  TB4 -A16
DC  TB4 -A16
power power
supply  -A17 supply  -A17
E E
(a) For Model 101,102, 201, 202 (a) For Model 103, 203, 204
Figure 6.4.1 Testing Binary Input Circuit
 Display the "Binary input & output" screen from the "Status" sub-menu.
/2 Bin a ry input & output 3/ 5

Input ( IO#1) [00 0 000 000 000 ]
Input ( IO#2) [00 0 ]
Output ( IO# 1-trip ) [000 ]
Output(IO# 2) [000 000 000 000 00 ]
Output(IO# 3) [000 000 000 0 ]
 Apply the rated DC voltage to terminal A4, B4, ..., A6 of terminal block TB4, and A14, B14
and A15 of terminal block TB3.
Check that the status display corresponding to the input signal changes from 0 to 1. (For
details of the binary input status display, see Section 4.2.4.2.)
The user will be able to perform this test for one terminal to another or for all the terminals at
once.
 119 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
6.4.3 Binary Output Circuit
This test can be performed by using the "Test" sub-menu and forcibly operating the relay drivers
and output relays. Operation of the output contacts is monitored at the output terminal. The output
contact and corresponding terminal number are shown in Appendix G.
 Press 2 (= Binary output) on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary output" screen. The LCD
displays the output modules mounted, depending on the model.
/2 Binary output
1 =IO# 2 2 =IO#3
 Enter the selected number corresponding to each module to be operated. Then the LCD
displays the name of the module, the name of the output relay, the name of the terminal block
and the terminal number to which the relay contact is connected.
/3 BO (0 =Disable 1=Enable) 1 /14
IO# 2 BO1 1
IO# 2 BO2 1
IO# 2 BO3 1
IO# 2 B O4 0
IO# 2 B O5 0
IO# 2 B O6 0
IO# 2 B O7 0
IO# 2 B O8 0
IO# 2 B O9 0
IO# 2 B O10 0
IO# 2 B O11 0
IO# 2 B O12 0
IO# 2 F AIL 0
IO# 2 BO13 0
 Enter 1 and press the ENTER key.
 After completing the entries, press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown
below. If 1 is entered for all the output relays, the following forcible operation can be
performed collectively.
/3 BO
 Keep pressing the 1 key to operate the output relays forcibly.
 Check that the output contacts operate at the terminal.

 Release pressing the 1 key to reset the operation.
 120 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
6.4.4 AC Input Circuits
This test can be performed by applying the checking voltages and currents to the AC input circuits
and verifying that the values applied coincide with the values displayed on the LCD screen.
The testing circuit for Model 100 series is shown in Figure 6.4.2. A single-phase voltage source
and two single-phase current sources are required. (Test Model 200 series by same testing method
of Model 100 series.)
GRT100 – 100 series

V
Single-phase TB1 -27
V
voltage -28
source
Single-phase A TB1 -1
Ia
current -2
source
-3
Ib
-4
-5
Ic
-6
-7 IN
-8
-9
Ia
-10
-11
Ib
-12
-13
Ic
-14
-15
IN
-16
 TB4 -A16
DC
power
supply  -A17
Figure 6.4.2 Testing AC Input Circuit (Model 100s)
 Check that the metering data is set to be expressed as secondary values (Display value = 2) on
the "Metering" screen.
"Setting (view)" sub-menu  "Status" setting screen  "Metering" screen
If the setting is Primary (Display value = 1), change the setting in the "Setting (change)"
sub-menu. Remember to reset it to the initial setting after the test is finished.
 Open the "Metering" screen in the "Status" sub-menu.
"Status" sub-menu  "Metering" screen
 Apply the rated AC voltages and currents and check that the displayed values are within  5%
of the input values.
 121 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
6.5 Function Test

6.5.1 Measuring Element
Measuring element characteristics are realized by the software, so it is possible to verify the
overall characteristics by checking representative points.
Operation of the element under test is observed by the binary output signal at monitoring jacks A
or B or by the LED indications above the jacks. In any case, the signal number corresponding to
each element output must be set on the "Logic circuit" screen of the "Test" sub-menu.
TermA( 0- 3071): 1
TermB( 0- 3071 ): 48
When a signal number is entered for the TermA line, the signal is observed at monitoring jack A
and when entered for the TermB line, observed at monitoring jack B.
Note: The voltage level at the monitoring jacks is +15V 3V for logic level "1" and less than 0.1V
for logic level "0".
CAUTION
 Use the testing equipment with more than 1k of internal impedance when observing the
output signal at the monitoring jacks.
 Do not apply an external voltage to the monitoring jacks.
In case of a three-phase element, it is enough to test for a representative phase. A-phase element is
selected hereafter.
6.5.1.1 Current differential element DIF

The current differential element is checked on the following items
 Operating current value
 Percentage restraining characteristic
 Operating time
Note: Set all the CT ratio matching settings (kct1 to kct3) to “1” and phase angle matching settings
(d1 to d3) to “0” in the testing described in 6.5.1.1 to 6.5.1.4, because the operating value
depends on the settings.
Operating current value

Minimum operating current value is checked by simulating a one-end infeed. Figure 6.5.1 shows
a testing circuit simulating an infeed from a primary winding.
 122 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
GRT100
 A
TB1 -1
Single-phase
current Ia
source
 -2
A
Monitoring
jack
0V
DC  TB4 -A16
power
supply  -A17

DC
voltmeter

Figure 6.5.1 Operating Current Value Test Circuit (Model 100s, 200s)
The output signal numbers of the DIF elements are as follows:

Element Signal number
DIF-A 44
DIF-B 45
DIF-C 46
 Press 4 (= Logic circuit) on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Logic circuit"
screen.
 Enter a signal number 44 to observe the DIF-A operation at monitoring jack A and press
the ENTER key.
 Apply a test current to A-phase current terminals and change the magnitude of the current
applied and measure the value at which the element DIF-A operates.
Check that the measured value is within 7% of the theoretical operating value.
Theoretical operating value = (CT secondary rated current)  (ik setting)
Percentage restraining characteristics

The percentage restraining characteristic is tested on the outflow current (Iout) and infeed current
(Iin) plane as shown in Figure 6.5.2. The characteristic shown in Figure 6.5.2 is equivalent to the
one on the differential current (Id) and restraining current (Ir) plane shown in Figure 2.11.1.
 123 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Iout
DF2
DF1
0 ik 2+p1 2p1 Iin

2 kp + 4 ik
Figure 6.5.2 Current Differential Element (Iout - Iin Plane)
Figure 6.5.3 shows a testing circuit simulating an infeed from a primary winding and outflow
from a secondary winding.
GRT100
Infeed current (Iin)
 A
TB1 -1
Single-phase Iin
current
source  -2
Outflow current 
(Iout) A
Monitoring
 A -9 jack
Single-phase 0V
Iout
current
source
 -10
DC  TB4 -A16
power
supply  -A17

DC
voltmeter

Figure 6.5.3 Percentage Restraining Characteristic Test of DIF (Model 100s, 200s)
 124 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
screen.
 Enter a signal number 44 to observe the DIF-A output at monitoring jack A and press the
ENTER key.
 Apply an infeed current to terminal TB1-1 and -2.

When the infeed current applied is larger than the setting of ik (pu) and smaller than
kp(2+p1)/2 + ik(2-p1)/4 (pu), characteristic DF1 is checked.
When the infeed current applied is larger than kp(2+ p1)/2 + ik(2- p1)/4 (pu), characteristic
DF2 is checked.
Note: When the default settings are applied, the critical infeed current which
determines DF1 checking or DF2 checking is 1.56×(CT secondary rated
current).
 Apply an outflow current of the same magnitude and counterphase with the infeed current
to terminal TB1-9 and 10.
 Decrease the out flow current in magnitude and measure the values at which the element
operates.
 Check that the measured values are within 7% of the theoretical values.
For characteristic DF1, the theoretical outflow current is given by the following equation:
Iout = (2p1)(Iinik)/(2+p1) (pu)
where, p1 = slope setting of DF1
ik = minimum operating current setting
When the default settings are applied, Iout = [(Iin0.3) / 3]× (CT secondary rated current).
For characteristic DF2, the theoretical outflow current is given by the following equation.
Iout = [(2p2)Iin (2p1)ik + 2(p2 p1)kp]/(2+ p2) (pu)
where, p2 = slope setting of DF2
kp = break point of DF1 and DF2
When the default settings are applied, Iout = 0.43× (CT secondary rated current).
Operating time
 125 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
GRT100
A TB1 -1
Single-phase Ia
current
source -2
A
Monitoring
jack
0V
DC  TB4 -A16
power
supply  -A17
Start
Time
counter
Stop
OV
Figure 6.5.4 Operating Time Test (Model 100s, 200s)
 Set a test current to 3 times of DIF operating current (= CT secondary rated current  ik
setting).
 Apply the test current and measure the operating time.
 Check that the operating time is 40 ms or less.
 126 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
6.5.1.2 2F element
GRT100
Current 
I1 TB1
source -1
Ia

50 or 60Hz -2
Current 
source I2
 A
100 or 120Hz Monitoring
jack
0V
 TB4 -A16
DC
power
supply  -A17

DC
voltmeter

Figure 6.5.5 Testing 2F Element (M0del 100s, 200s)
The output signal number of the 2F element is as follows:

2F 122
 Set the second harmonic restraint setting k2f to 15%(= default setting).
screen.
 Enter a signal number to observe the 2F output at monitoring jack A and press the
ENTER key.
 Set the fundamental frequency current I1 to 3 times of ik setting. Change the magnitude of
the second harmonic current I2 and measure the value at which the element operates.
 Calculate the percentage of the second harmonic by I2/I1 when the element operates.
Check that the percentage is within 7% of the k2f setting.
 127 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
6.5.1.3 5F element
GRT100
Current 
TB1
source I1 -1
Ia

50 or 60Hz -2
Current 
source I2
 A
250 or 300Hz Monitoring
jack
0V
 TB4 -A16
DC
power
supply  -A17

DC
voltmeter

Figure 6.5.6 Testing 5F Element (Model 100s, 200s)
The output signal number of the 5F element is as follows:

5F 123
 Set the fifth harmonic restraint setting k5f to 30%.(= default setting)
screen.
 Enter a signal number to observe the 5F output at monitoring jack A and press the
ENTER key.
 Set the fundamental frequency current I1 to 3 times of ik setting. Change the magnitude of
the fifth harmonic current I5 and measure the value at which the element operates.
 Calculate the percentage of the fifth harmonic by I5/I1 when the element operates. Check
that the percentage is within 7% of the k5f setting.
 128 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
6.5.1.4 High-set overcurrent element HOC
Operating current value

The output signal numbers of the HOC elements are as follows:

HOC-A 41
HOC-B 42
HOC-C 43
screen.
 Enter a signal number 41 to observe the HOC-A output at monitoring jack A and press the
ENTER key.
 Apply a test current to A-phase current terminals and change the magnitude of the current
applied and measure the value at which the element operates.
Check that the measured value is within 7% of the following value.
Operating value = (CT secondary rated current)  (kh setting)
Operating time
 Set a test current to 2 times of HOC operating current (= CT secondary rated current  kh
setting)
 Apply the test current and measure the operating time.
 Check that the operating time is 25 ms or less.
 129 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
6.5.1.5 Restricted earth fault element REF

The restricted earth fault element is checked on the following items.
 Operating current value
 Percentage restraining characteristic
Note: Set all the CT ratio matching settings (1kct1 - 1kct3 to 3kct1 - 3kct3) to "1", because the
operating value depends on the settings.
Operation current value

GRT100
 TB1 -7
A
Single-phase IN
current
source  -8
A
Monitoring
jack
0V
DC  TB4 -A16
power
supply  -A17

DC
voltmeter

Figure 6.5.7 Operating Current Value Test of REF_DIF element (Model 100s, 200s)
The test current input terminal number and output signal number of the REF_DIF element is as
follows:
Element Input terminal Output signal
number number
1REF_DIF TB1-7 and –8 29
2REF_DIF TB1-15 and –16 30
3REF=DIF TB1-23 and –24 31
screen.
 Enter the signal number 29 to observe the 1REF_DIF output at monitoring jack A and press
the ENTER key.
 Apply a test current to TB1-7 and -8 and change the magnitude of the current applied and
measure the value at which the element operates.
Check that the measured value is within 15% of the theoretical operating value.
Theoretical operating value = (CT secondary rated current) × (1ik setting)
 130 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Percentage restraining characteristics

The percentage restraining characteristic is tested on the outflow current (l out) and infeed current
(lin) plane as shown in Figure 6.5.8. The characteristic shown in Figure 6.5.8 is equivalent to the
one on the differential current (ld) and restraining current (lr) plane shown in Figure 2.11.2.
Iout
DF2
DF1
Operating zone
0 ik [kp･p2 + (1- p1)ik]/(p2 – p1) Iin
Figure 6.5.8 REF_DIF Element (Iout - Iin Plane)
Figure 6.5.9 shows a testing circuit simulating infeed from a neutral circuit and outflow from a
primary winding.
GRT100
 A
TB1 -1
Single-phase Iin
current
source  -2

A
Monitoring
 A -7 jack
Single-phase 0V
Iout
current
source
 -8
DC  TB4 -A16
power
supply  -A17
DC 
voltmeter

Figure 6.5.9 Testing Restricted Earth Fault Element (Model 100s, 200s)
 Enter a signal number 29 to observe the 1REF_DIF output at monitoring jack A and press the
 131 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
ENTER key.
 Apply an infeed current to terminal TB1-1 and -2.

When the infeed current applied is larger than the setting of ik (pu) and smaller than [kpp2 +
(1p1)ik]/(p2  p1) (pu), characteristic DF1 is checked.
When the infeed current applied is larger than [kpp2 + (1p1)ik]/(p2  p1) (pu), characteristic
DF2 is checked.
Note: When the default settings are applied, the critical infeed current which
determines DF1 checking or DF2 checking is 1.6×(CT secondary rated
current).
 Apply an outflow current of the same magnitude and counterphase with the infeed current, to
terminal TB1-7 and -8.
 Decrease the outflow current in magnitude and measure the values at which the element
operates.
 Check that the measured values are within 15% of the theoretical values.
For characteristic DF1, the theoretical outflow current is given by the following equation.
Iout = (1p1)(Iinik) (pu)
where,
p1 = slope setting of DF1 (= 0.1 fixed)
ik = minimum operating current setting
When the default settings are applied, Iout = 0.9× (Iin – 0.5) × (CT secondary rated current). For
characteristic DF2, the theoretical outflow current is given by the following equation
Iout = (1p2) Iin + p2×kp (pu)
where,
p2 = slope setting of DF2
kp = restraining current section setting of DF2
When the default settings are applied, Iout = 1.0 × (CT secondary rated current).
 132 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
6.5.1.6 Definite time overcurrent elements OC, EF

GRT100
A TB1 -1
Ia
Single-phase
-2
current
source -7
IN
-8
A
Monitoring
jack
0V
DC  TB4 -A16
power
supply  -A17
Figure 6.5.10 Testing OC and EF (Model 100s, 200s)

1OC, 2OC, 3OC 47, 53, 59
1EF, 2EF, 3EF 72, 75, 78
The testing procedure is as follows:

 Press 4 (= Logic circuit) on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Logic circuit" screen.
 Enter a signal number to observe the OC or EF output at monitoring jack A and press the
ENTER key.
 Apply a test current and change the magnitude of the current applied and measure the value at
which the element operates.
Check that the measured value is within 5% of the theoretical operating value..
Theoretical operating value = (CT secondary rated current) × (OC or EF setting)
 133 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
6.5.1.7 Inverse time overcurrent elements OCI, EFI

GRT100
A TB1 -1
Ia
Single-phase
-2
current
source -7
IN
-8
A
Monitoring
jack
0V
DC  TB4 -A16
power
supply  -A17
Start
Time
counter
Stop
OV
Figure 6.5.11 Testing OCI and EFI (Model 100s, 200s)
One of the four inverse time characteristics can be set, and the output signal numbers are as
follows:
1OCI, 2OCI, 3OCI 50, 56, 62
1EFI, 2EFI, 3EFI 73, 76, 79
Fix the time characteristic to test by setting the OCI or EFI on the "OC" screen.
"Setting (change)" sub-menu  "Protection" screen  "Trip" screen  "Protection element"
screen  "OC" screen

 Press 4 (= Logic circuit) on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Logic circuit" screen.
 Enter a signal number to observe the OCI or EFI output at monitoring jack A and press the
ENTER key.
 Apply a test current and measure the operating time. The magnitude of the test current should
be between 1.2  Is to 20  Is, where Is = (CT secondary rated current) × (OCI or EFI current
setting).
 Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section
2.11.4. Check that the measured operating time is within the error mentioned below.
Accuracy: Standard, Very and Long-time inverse: IEC 60255-3 class 5
Extremely inverse: IEC 60255-3 class 7.5
 134 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
6.5.1.8 Thermal overload element THR

GRT100
 A TB1 -1
Ia
Single-phase
current
source  -2
A
Monitoring
jack
0V
DC  TB4 -A16
power
supply  -A17
Start
Time
counter
Stop
OV
Figure 6.5.12 Testing THR (Model 100s, 200s)
This test is performed using time-shortened output signals because the operating time is in the
order of minutes. The operating time of the time-shortened signals is one sixtieth that of the
regular signals.
The time-shortened output signal number of the THR element is as follows:
Element Signal number Remarks
THR-A_TEST 88 Alarm
THR-S_TEST 84 Trip
The short-time testing procedure is as follows:

 Set the relay:  = 60.0min, k = 1.30, IB = 1.00, IP = 0.80, TA = 10min
screen.
 Enter a signal number to observe the THR short-time output at monitoring jack A and press
the ENTER key.
 Apply a test current to 200% of the rated current and measure the operating time.
 Check that the measured operating time is within 10% of the following value.
Element Operating time (10%)
THR-A 11.5s (10.3s – 12.7s)
THR-S 22.5s (20.2s – 24.8s)
 135 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
6.5.1.9 Frequency element FRQ

The frequency element is checked on the following items
 Operating frequency
 Undervoltage block
Operating frequency test

GRT100
V f
 TB1 -27
Variable
frequency V
source
 -28
A
Monitoring
jack
DC  TB4 -A16 0V
power
supply  -A17

DC
voltmeter

Figure 6.5.13 Testing Frequency Element (Model 100s, 200s)
The output signal numbers of the FRQ elements are as follows:

81-1 89 Underfrequency tripping
91 Overfrequency tripping
81-2 90 Underfrequency alarm
92 Overfrequency alarm
screen.
 Enter a signal number to observe the FRQ output at monitoring jack A and press the
ENTER key.
 Apply rated voltage and change the magnitude of the frequency applied and measure the
value at which the element operates. Check that the measured value is within 0.03Hz of
the setting.
Undervoltage block test

 Apply rated voltage and change the magnitude of frequency to operate the element.
 Keep the frequency that the element is operating, and change the magnitude of the voltage
applied from the rated voltage to less than UV setting voltage. And then, check that the
element resets.
 136 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
6.5.1.10 Overexcitation element V/F

The overexcitation element is checked on the following items
 Operating value of definite time tripping and alarm characteristic
 Operating time of inverse time tripping characteristic
The output signal numbers of the V/F elements are as follows:
V/F 80 Definite time tripping
81 Inverse time tripping
82 Definite time alarm
Operating value test for definite time tripping and alarm

GRT100
 TB1 -27
Single-phase
V V
voltage
source  -28
A
Monitoring
jack
0V
DC  TB4 -A16
power
supply  -A17

DC
voltmeter

Figure 6.5.14 Operating Value Test of V/F (Model 100s, 200s)
 Set V (rated voltage setting) to 100V.

screen.
 Enter a signal number 80 or 82 to observe the V/F output at monitoring jack A and press the
ENTER key.
 Apply a test voltage at rated frequency and increase the magnitude of the voltage applied
and measure the value at which an alarm signal or a trip signal is output.
Check that the measured values are within 2% of (V setting)  (A setting) for an alarm
signal and (V setting)  (H setting) for a trip signal.
 137 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Operating time characteristic test

GRT100
V
Single-phase TB1 -27
voltage V
source
-28
 TB4 -A16 A
DC Monitoring
power jack
supply  -A17 0V
E
Start
Time
counter
Stop
OV
Figure 6.5.15 Operating Time Characteristic Test of V/F (Model 100s, 200s)

screen.
 Enter a signal number 81 to observe the inverse time tripping output at monitoring jack A
and press the ENTER key.
Note: Set the swich [Reset] to “Off” “On” “Off” to initialize a time count. See Section 4.2.7.1.
 Apply a test voltage at rated frequency and measure the operating time. The magnitude of
the test voltage should be between (V setting)  (L setting) and (V setting)  (H setting).
 Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in
Section 2.11.8 where V is the test voltage. Check that the measured operating time is from
15% to 10% of the calculated value.
6.5.2 Timer Test
The pick-up delay time of the variable timer can be measured by connecting the monitoring jacks
A and B to a time counter as shown in Figure 6.5.15. Jacks A and B are used to observe the input
signal and output signal of the timer, respectively.
GRT100
DC  TB4 -A16
A
power
supply  -A17 Monitoring B
jack
E 0V
Start
Time
counter Stop
0V
Figure 6.5.16 Testing Variable Timer (Model 100s, 200s)
 138 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
 Press 3 (= Timer) on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Timer" screen.
 Enter the number corresponding to the timer to be observed. The timers and assigned
numbers are listed in Appendix C.
 Press the END key to display the following screen.
/2 Timer
Press ENTER to operate.
 Press the ENTER key to start measuring the time. The "TESTING" LED turns on, and
timer is initiated and the following display appears. The input and output signals of the
timer can be observed at monitoring jacks A and B respectively.
Check that the measured time is within  10ms of the setting time.
During the test, the following display appears on the LCD and the LEDs above the jacks
are also lit if the input or output signal exists.
/2 Timer
Operati ng......
Press END to reset.
 Press the END key to reset the input signal to the timer. The "TESTING" LED turns off.
 Press the CANCEL key to test other timers. Repeat the above testing.
 139 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
6.5.3 Protection Scheme
In the protection scheme tests, a dynamic test set is required to simulate power system pre-fault,
fault and post-fault conditions.
Tripping is observed with the tripping command output relays TRIP-1 to -5.
Check that the indications and recordings are correct.
6.5.4 Metering and Recording
The metering function can be checked while testing the AC input circuit. See Section 6.4.4.
Fault recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. Open the "Fault records"
screen and check that the descriptions are correct for the applied fault.
Recording events are listed in Table 3.4.1. The top 8 events are external events and others are
internal events. Event recording on the external events can be checked by changing the status of
binary input signals. Change the status in the same way as the binary input circuit test (see Section
6.4.2) and check that the description displayed on the "Event Records" screen is correct.
Note: Whether to record or not can be set for each event. Change the status of the binary input signal
after confirming that the related event is set to record. (The default setting enables all the events
to be recorded.)
Some of the internal events can be checked in the protection scheme tests.
Disturbance recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. The LCD display
only shows the date and time when a disturbance is recorded. Open the "Disturbance records"
screen and check that the descriptions are correct.
Details can be displayed on the PC. Check that the descriptions on the PC are correct. For details
on how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the RSM100 Manual.
 140 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
6.6 Conjunctive Tests

6.6.1 On Load Test
With the relay connected to the line which is carrying a load current, it is possible to check the
polarity of the voltage transformer and current transformer and the phase rotation with the
metering displays on the LCD screen.
 Open the following "Metering" screen from the "Status" sub-menu.
/2 Metering 16/Oct/1997 18:13 3/19
Ia1 .kA . Ia2 .kA .
Ib1 .kA . Ib2 .kA .
Ic1 .kA . Ic2 .kA .
I11 .kA . I12 .kA .
I21 .kA . I22 .kA .
I01 .kA . I02 .kA .
In1 .kA . In2 .kA .
Ia3 .kA .
Ib3 .kA .
Ic3 .kA .
I13 .kA .
I23 .kA .
I03 .kA .
In3 .kA .
V .kV .
Ida .pu Id01.pu
Idb .pu Id02.pu
Idc .pu Id03.pu
T HM    .  %
Frequency .Hz
Note: The magnitude of voltage and current can be set in values on the primary side or on the
secondary side by the setting. (The default setting is the primary side.)
Phase angles are expressed taking that of the voltage input as the reference angle.
 Check that the phase rotation is correct.

 Verify the phase relation between voltage and current with a known load current direction.
6.6.2 Tripping Circuit Test
The tripping circuit including the circuit breaker is checked by forcibly operating the output relay
and monitoring the breaker that is tripped. Forcible operation of the output relay is performed on
the "Binary output" screen of the "Test" sub-menu as described in Section 6.4.3.
Tripping circuit
 Set the breaker to be closed.
 Press 2 (= Binary output) on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Binary output" screen.
The LCD displays the output modules mounted.
 Enter 1 to select the IO1 module, then the LCD displays the screen shown below.
 141 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
/3 BO (0 =Disable 1=Enable) 1/ 5
IO# 1 TP-1 1
IO# 1 TP-2 1
IO# 1 TP-3 1
IO# 1 TP-4 0
IO# 1 TP-5 0
TP-1 to 5 are output relays with one normally open contact. Models 103, 203 and 204 are not
provided with TP-4 and TP-5.
 Enter 1 for TP-1 and press the ENTER key.
 Press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown below.
/3 BO
 Keep pressing the 1 key to operate the output relay TP-1 and check that the No. 1 breaker is
tripped.
 Release pressing the 1 key to reset the operation.
 Repeat the above for other output relays TP-2 to TP-5.
 142 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
6.7 Maintenance
6.7.1 Regular Testing
The relay is almost completely self-supervised. The circuits which cannot be supervised are
binary input and output circuits and human interfaces.
Therefore regular testing can be minimized to checking the unsupervised circuits. The test
procedures are the same as described in Sections 6.4.1, 6.4.2 and 6.4.3.
6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair
Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.

When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued with the binary output signal
of FAIL and the failure is indicated on the front panel with LED indicators or LCD display. It is
also recorded in the event record.
Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the "Auto-supervision "screen on the
LCD.
If any messages are shown on the LCD, the failed module or failed external circuits can be located
by referring to Table 6.7.1.
This table shows the relationship between messages displayed on the LCD and the estimated
failure location. Locations marked with (1) have a higher probability than locations marked with
(2).
As shown in the table, some of the messages cannot identify the fault location definitely but
suggest plural possible failure locations. In these cases, the failure location is identified by
replacing the suggested failed modules with spare modules one by one until the "Alarm" LED is
turned off.
The replacement or investigation should be performed first for the module or circuit with higher
probability in the table.
If there is a failure and the LCD is not working such as a screen is frozen or not displayed, the
failure location is either SPM or HMI module.
 143 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Table 6.7.1 LCD Message and Failure Location
Message Failure location

VCT SPM IO1 or IO2 IO3 HMI AC cable
IO8
Checksum err 
ROM-RAM err 
SRAM err 
BU-RAM err 
DPRAM err 
EEPROM err 
A/D err 
CT1 err  (2)  (1)  (2)
CT2 err  (2)  (1)  (2)
CT3 err  (2)  (1)  (2)
Sampling err 
DIO err  (2)  (1)  (1)  (1)
RSM err  (2)  (1)
No-working of LCD  (2)  (1)
The location marked with (1) has a higher probability than the location marked with (2).
 144 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
If no message is shown on the LCD, this means that the failure location is either in the DC power
supply circuit or in the microprocessors mounted on the SPM module. Then check the "ALARM"
LED. If it is off, the failure is in the DC power supply circuit. If it is lit, open the relay front panel
and check the LEDs mounted on the SPM module. If the LED is off, the failure is in the DC power
supply circuit. If the LED is lit, the failure is in the microprocessors.
In the former case, check if the correct DC voltage is applied to the relay.
If so, replace the IO1 or IO8 module mounting the DC/DC converter and confirm that the
"ALARM" LED is turned off.
In the latter case, replace the SPM module containing the processors and confirm that the
When a failure is detected during regular testing, it will not be difficult to identify the failed
module to be replaced.
Note: When a failure or an abnormality is detected during the regular test, confirm the following
first:
- Test circuit connections are correct.
- Modules are securely inserted in position.
- Correct DC power voltage with correct polarity is applied and connected to the correct
terminals.
- Correct AC inputs are applied and connected to the correct terminals.
- Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual.
6.7.3 Replacing Failed Modules
If the failure is identified to be in the relay module and the user has spare modules, the user can
recover the protection by replacing the failed modules.
Repair at the site should be limited to module replacement. Maintenance at the component level is
not recommended.
Check that the replacement module has an identical module name (VCT, SPM, IO1, IO2, etc.) and
hardware type-form as the removed module. Furthermore, the SPM module should have the same
software name.
The module name is indicated on the bottom front of the relay case. The hardware type-form is
indicated on the module in the following format:
Module name Hardware type-form
VCT G1PC2-
SPM G1SP-
IO1 G1IO1-
IO2 G1IO2-
IO3 G1IO3-
IO8 G1IO8-
HMI --
 145 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
The software name is indicated on the memory device on the module with letters such as
GS1TM1-, GS1TM2-, etc.
CAUTION When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed
wrist band and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise,
many of the electronic components could suffer damage.
CAUTION After replacing the SPM module, check all of the settings including the data
related the PLC and IEC103, etc. are restored the original settings.
The initial replacement procedure is as follows:
 Switch off the DC power supply.
WARNING Hazardous voltage may remain in the DC circuit just after switching off the
DC power supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to
discharge.
 Disconnect the trip outputs.
 Short circuit all AC current inputs and disconnect all AC voltage inputs.
 Unscrew the relay front cover.
Replacing the Human Machine Interface (HMI) Module (Front Panel)

 Open the front panel of the relay by unscrewing the binding screw located on the left side of
the front panel.
 Unplug the ribbon cable on the front panel by pushing the catch outside.
 Remove the two retaining screws and one earthing screw on the relay case side, then detach
the front panel from the relay case.
 Attach the replacement module in the reverse procedure.
Replacing the Transformer (VCT) Module

CAUTION Before pulling out the transformer module, pull out all other modules. For the
method of pulling out other module, see the section "Replacing other module".
 Open the right-side front panel (HMI module) by unscrewing the two binding screws located
on the left side of the panel.
 Open the left-side front panel by unscrewing the two binding screws located on the right side
of the panel.
 Detach the module holding bar by unscrewing the binding screw located on the left side of the
bar.
 Unplug the ribbon cable on the SPM module by nipping the catch.
 Remove the metal cover by unscrewing the binding screw located at the top and bottom of the
cover.
 Pull out the module.
 Insert the replacement module in the reverse procedure.
Replacing other modules

 Open the right-side front panel (HMI module) by unscrewing the two binding screws
located on the left side of the panel.
 Open the left-side front panel by unscrewing the two binding screws located on the right side
 146 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
of the panel.
 Detach the module holding bar by unscrewing the binding screw located on the left side of the
bar.
 Unplug the ribbon cable running among the modules by nipping the catch (in case of black
connector) and by pushing the catch outside (in case of gray connector) on the connector.
 Pull out the module by pulling up or down the top and bottom levers.
 Insert the replacement module in the reverse procedure.
 After replacing the SPM module, input the user setting values again.
For failed module tracing and its replacement, see Appendix Q.
6.7.4 Resumption of Service
After replacing the failed module or repairing failed external circuits, take the following
procedures for the relay to restore the service.
 Switch on the DC power supply and confirm that the "IN SERVICE" green LED is lit and the
"ALARM" red LED is not lit.
Note: Supply DC power after checking that all the modules are in their original positions and the ribbon
cables are plugged in.
 Supply the AC inputs and reconnect the trip outputs.
6.7.5 Storage
The spare relay or module should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC Standard
60255-6 the storage temperature should be 25C to +70C, but the temperature of 0C to +40C
is recommended for long-term storage.
 147 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
7. Putting Relay into Service

The following procedure must be adhered to when putting the relay into service after finishing
commissioning or maintenance tests.
 Check that all external connections are correct.
 Check the setting of all measuring elements, timers, scheme switches, recordings and clock are
correct.
In particular, when settings are changed temporarily for testing, be sure to restore them.
 Clear any unnecessary records on faults, events and disturbances which are recorded during
the tests.
 Press the VIEW key and check that no failure message is displayed on the
"Auto-supervision" screen.
 Check that the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and no other LEDs are lit on the front panel.
 148 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
 149 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Appendix A
Block Diagram
 149 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Scheme Logic No.1

DIFT
DIFT HOC &
S Q
Selection F/F 1
(#87) DIF 1 switches for R
each element
2f lock 1 &
5f lock 1 (ON) &

+ 1
 (OFF)
& RESET
TRIP-1
TRIP OUTPUT
+ (ON) TP1
1OC L/O CONTACT No.1
1OC (#150) t 0
- (OFF)
0.00-10.00s
1OCI(#151) 1OCI TRIP OUTPUT
TP2
CONTACT No.2
2OC
t 0 TRIP OUTPUT
2OC (#250) TP3
CONTACT No.3
0.00-10.00s
2OCI(#251) 2OCI TRIP OUTPUT
TP4
CONTACT No.4
3OC 1
t 0 TRIP OUTPUT
3OC (#350) TP5
CONTACT No.5
0.00-10.00s 3OCI Scheme Logic No.2
TRIP-2
3OCI(#351)
DIFT
1REF 1OC
1REF(#187N) 1OCI
Scheme Logic No.3
1EF TRIP-3
2OC
t 0 Same as DIFT
1EF (#150N) 2OCI No.1 1OC
0.00-10.00s 3OC circuit
1EFI 1OCI
1EFI(#151N) 3OCI
2OC
1REF Same as
2REF 2OCI
2REF(#287N) No.1 Scheme Logic No.4
1EF 3OC circuit TRIP-4
2EF DIFT
1EFI 3OCI
2EF (#250N) t 0 1OC
2REF 1REF
0.00-10.00s 2EF 1OCI
2EFI 1EF
2EFI(#251N) 2EFI 2OC
Same as
Scheme Logic No.5
TRIP-5
1EFI
2OCI No.1 DIFT
3REF 3REF
2REF circuit
3REF(#387N) 3EF 3OC 1OC
2EF
3EF 3EFI 3OCI 1OCI
t 0 2EFI
3EF (#350N) 1REF 2OC
V/F 3REF Same as
0.00-10.00s 3EFI 1EF 2OCI No.1
THR
3EF circuit
3EFI(#351N) 1EFI 3OC
FRQ
3EFI
V/F 2REF 3OCI
MT-1
V/F 1REF
V/F L 2EF
1 MT-2 THR
(#59/81) H t 0 2EFI 1EF
MT-3 FRQ
3REF 1EFI
0.00-10.00s MT-4 MT-1
THR 3EF 2REF
THR S MT-2
1 3EFI 2EF
(#49) A MT-3 2EFI
V/F
FRQ MT-4 3REF
t 0 THR
FRQ L FRQ 3EF
0.00-10.00s 1
(#81) H MT-1 3EFI
t 0
MT-2 V/F
0.00-10.00s
MT-3 THR
MT-4 FRQ
MT-1
EXT_MEC.TP1
Ext.Mechanical Trip 1 MT-2
EXT_MEC.TP2 MT-3
Ext.Mechanical Trip ２
EXT_MEC.TP3 MT-4
Ext.Mechanical Trip ３
EXT_MEC.TP4
Ext.Mechanical Trip ４
: Relay Element : Binary input/output
Note: Models 103, 203 and Block

204 are not of
Diagram provided withDifferential
Transformer TRIP-4 and RelayTRIP-5.
GRT100
Block Diagram of Transformer Differential Relay GRT100
 150 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Appendix B
Signal List
 151 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Signal list
No. Signal Name Contents
0 CONSTANT_0 constant 0
1 CONSTANT_1 constant 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38 DIF_NBLK-A Differential element(2f/5f lock is not included)
39 DIF_NBLK-B ditto
40 DIF_NBLK-C ditto
41 DIFT_HOC-A Differential relay
42 DIFT_HOC-B ditto
43 DIFT_HOC-C ditto
44 DIFT_DIF-A ditto
45 DIFT_DIF-B ditto
46 DIFT_DIF-C ditto
47 1OC-A OC relay
48 1OC-B ditto
49 1OC-C ditto
50 1OCI-A Inverse time OC relay
51 1OCI-B ditto
52 1OCI-C ditto
53 2OC-A OC relay
54 2OC-B ditto
55 2OC-C ditto
57 2OCI-B ditto
58 2OCI-C ditto
59 3OC-A OC relay
60 3OC-B ditto
61 3OC-C ditto
63 3OCI-B ditto
64 3OCI-C ditto
65 4OC-A OC relay
66 4OC-B ditto
67 4OC-C ditto
69 4OCI-B ditto
70 4OCI-C ditto
 152 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Signal list
71 1REF Restricted earth fault relay
72 1EF Earth fault relay
73 1EFI Inverse time earth fault relay
80 V/F-H Overexcitation relay
81 V/F-T ditto
82 V/F-A ditto
83 THR-S Thermal overload relay
84 THR-S_TEST Thermal overload relay (for testing)
85
86
87 THR-A Thermal overload relay
88 THR-A_TEST Thermal overload relay (for testing)
89 FRQ-L1 Frequency relay
90 FRQ-L2 ditto
91 FRQ-H1 ditto
92 FRQ-H2 ditto
93
94
95 2F-A 2nd harmonic inrush current detection
96 2F-B ditto
97 2F-C ditto
98 5F-A fifth harmonic components detection
99 5F-B ditto
100 5F-C ditto
101 CT_SAT-A CT saturation
102 CT_SAT-B ditto
103 CT_SAT-C ditto
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121 DIF_TRIP DIF relay trip
122 2F_LOCK 2F detect
123 5F_LOCK 5F detect
124 DIF-T1 DIF relay trip 1
129 T1OC 1OC relay timer
130 1OC-1 1OC relay trip 1
135 1OCI-1 1OCI relay trip 1
 153 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Signal list

173 T1REF 1REF relay timer
174 T1EF 1EF relay timer
175 1REF-1 1REF relay trip 1
180 1EF-1 1EF relay trip 1
185 1EFI-1 1EFI relay trip 1
 154 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Signal list

224 DIF-T DIFT relay trip
225 1OCI 1OCI relay trip
229 V/F_TRIP V/F trip
230 FRQ FRQ trip
231
232
233
234
235 TV/F-H V/F-H relay timer
236 TV/F-A V/F-A relay timer
237 V/F-1 V/F relay trip 1
242 V/F-ALARM V/F relay alarm
243 THR-1 THR relay trip 1
248 THR-ALARM THR relay alarm
249 TFRQ-L FRQ-L relay timer
250 TFRQ-H FRQ-H relay timer
251 TFRQ-A FRQ-A relay timer
252 FRQ-1 FRQ relay trip 1
257 FRQ-A FRQ relay alarm
258 MEC.TRIP1-1 Mechanical trip 1
259 MEC.TRIP1-2 ditto
278 WIND.1_TP-1 Element for trip 1
279 WIND.2_TP-1 ditto
 155 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Signal list

282 MEC.TRIP-1 ditto
283 ELEMENT_OR-1 ditto
284 TRIP-1 Trip O/P-1
313 TRIP Trip signal shot
314 TRIP-DETOR Trip O/P OR
315 TP1 Trip command without off-delay timer
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
:
:
:
508
509
510
 156 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Signal list
511
512
513 BI1_COMMAND Binary input signal BI1
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
:
:
1238
1239
1240
 157 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Signal list
1241 IEC_MDBLK monitor direction blocked

1242 IEC_TESTMODE IEC60870-5-103 testmode
1243 GROUP1_ACTIVE group1 active
1251 RLY_FAIL RELAY FAILURE
1252 RLY_OP_BLK RELAY OUTPUT BLOCK
1253 A.M.F._OFF SV BLOCK
1254
1255
1256
1257
1258 RELAY_FAIL-A RELAY FAILURE (only alarm)
1259
1260
1261 TRIP-H Trip signal hold
1262
1263
1264
1265
1266
1267 CT1_ERR CT failure
1268 CT2_ERR ditto
1269 CT3_ERR ditto
1270 CT4_ERR ditto
1271 CT_ERR ditto
1272
1273
1274
1275
1276
1277
1278
1279 GEN_PICKUP General start/pick-up
1280 GEN_TRIP General trip
1281
1282
1283
1284 BI1_COM_UF Binary input signal BI1 (unfiltered)
1297
1298
1299
1300
1301
1302
1303
1304
1305
1306
:
:
1398
1399
1400
 158 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Signal list
1401
1402
1403 NORM_LED_ON IN-SERVICE LED ON
1404 ALM_LED_ON ALARM LED ON
1405 TRIP_LED_ON TRIP LED ON
1406 TEST_LED_ON TEST LED ON
1407
1408
1409 LED_RESET TRIP LED RESET
1410
1411
1412
1413 PROT_COM_ON IEC103 communication command
1414 PRG_LED1_ON PROGRAMMABLE LED1 ON
1418
1419
1420
1421
1422
1423
1424
1425
1426
1427
1428
1429
1430
1431
1432
1433
1434 F.Record_DONE fault record sotred
1435 F.Record_CLR Fault record clear
1436 E.Record_CLR Event record clear
1437 D.Record_CLR Disturbance record clear
1438
1439
1440
1441
1442
1443
1444
1445 PLC_data_CHG PLC data change
1446
1447
1448 Sys.set_change System setting change
1449 Rly.set_change Relay setting change
1450 Grp.set_change Group setting change
1451
1452
1453
1454
1455
1456 KEY-VIEW VIEW key status (1:pressed)
1457 KEY-RESET RESET key status (2:pressed)
1458 KEY-ENTER ENTER key status (3:pressed)
1459 KEY-END END key status (4:pressed)
1460 KEY-CANCEL CANCEL key status (5:pressed)
1461
1462
1463
1464
1465
1466
1467
1468
1469
1470
 159 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Signal list
1471
1472 SUM_err Program ROM checksum error
1473
1474 SRAM_err SRAM memory monitoring error
1475 BU-RAM_err BU-RAM memory monitoring error
1476 DP-RAM_err DP-RAM memory monitoring error
1477 EEPROM_err EEPROM memory monitoring error
1478 SUB-CPU_err Sub-CPU stopped
1479 A/D_err A/D accuracy checking error
1480
1481
1482
1483
1484 DIO_err DIO card connection error
1485
1486 LCD_err LCD panel connection error
1487
1488
1489
1490
1491
1492
1493
1494
1495
1496
1497
1498
1499
1500
1501
1502
1503
1504
1505
1506
1507
1508
1509
1510
1511
1512
1513
1514
1515
1516
1517
1518
1519
1520
1521
1522
1523
1524
1525
1526
1527
1528
1529
1530
1531
1532
1533
1534
1535
 160 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Signal list
1536 EXT_MEC.TP1 External mechanical trip commnad 1

1540 IND.RESET Indication reset command
1541
1542
1543
1544
1545
1546
1547
1548
1549
1550
1551
1552 EVENT1 External event command 1
1555
1556
1557
1558
1559
1560
1561
1562
1563
1564
1565
1566
1567
1568 PROT_BLOCK Protection block command
1569 DIF_BLOCK DIF trip block command
1570 1REF_BLOCK 1REF trip block command
1571 1OC_BLOCK 1OC trip block command
1572 1OCI_BLOCK 1OCI trip block command
1573 1EF_BLOCK 1EF trip block command
1574 1EFI_BLOCK 1EFI trip block command
1587 FRQ_BLOCK FRQ trip block command
1588 FRQ-A_BLOCK FRQ-A trip block command
1589 V/F_BLOCK V/F trip block command
1590 V/F-A_BLOCK V/F-A trip block command
1591 THR_BLOCK THR trip block command
1592 THR-A_BLOCK THR-A trip block command
1593 MEC.TP1_BLOCK MEC.TP1 trip block command
1597
1598
1599
1600 TP1_DELAY Trip command off-delay timer setting
1605
 161 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Signal list
1606
1607
1608
1609
1610
1611
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616 DIF-A_BLOCK DIF-A trip blocking command
1617 DIF-B_BLOCK DIF-B trip blocking command
1618 DIF-C_BLOCK DIF-C trip blocking command
1619
1620
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
1626
1627
1628
1629
1630
1631
1632
1633
1634
1635
1636
1637
1638
1639
1640
1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1648
1649
1650
1651
1652
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
1660
1661
1662
1663
1664
1665
1666
1667
1668
1669
1670
:
:
1788
1789
1790
 162 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Signal list
1791
1792 IO#1-TP1 Binary output signal of TP1
1797
1798
1799
1800
1801
1802
1803
1804
1805
1806
1807
1808
1809
1810
1811
1812
1813
1814
1815
1816
1817
1818
1819
1820
1821
1822
1823
1824
1825
1826
1827
1828
1829
1830
1831
1832
1833
1834
1835
1836
1837
1838
1839
1840
1841
1842
1843
1844
1845
1846
1847
1848
1849
1850
1851
1852
1853
1854
1855
:
:
2618
2619
2620
 163 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Signal list
2621
2622
2623
2624 F.RECORD1 Fault record stored command 1
2628
2629
2630
2631
2632 D.RECORD1 Disturbance record stored command 1
2633 D.RECORD2 2
2634 D.RECORD3 3
2635 D.RECORD4 4
2636
2637
2638
2639
2640 SET.GROUP1 Active setting group changed commamd (Change to group1)
2641 SET.GROUP2 2
2642 SET.GROUP3 3
2643 SET.GROUP4 4
2644 SET.GROUP5 5
2645 SET.GROUP6 6
2646 SET.GROUP7 7
2647 SET.GROUP8 8
2648
2649
2650
2651
2652
2653
2654
2655
2656
2657
2658
2659
2660
2661
2662
2663
2664
2665
2666
2667
2668
2669
2670
2671
2672
2673
2674
2675
2676
2677
2678
2679
2680
2681
2682
2683
2684
2685
2686 PROT_COM_RECV protection inactivate command received
2687
2688 TPLED_RST_RCV TRIP LED RESET command received
:
2810
 164 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Signal list
2811
2812
2813
2814
2815
2816 TEMP001
2817 TEMP002
2818 TEMP003
2819 TEMP004
2820 TEMP005
2821 TEMP006
2822 TEMP007
2823 TEMP008
2824 TEMP009
2825 TEMP010
2826 TEMP011
2827 TEMP012
2828 TEMP013
2829 TEMP014
2830 TEMP015
2831 TEMP016
2832 TEMP017
2833 TEMP018
2834 TEMP019
2835 TEMP020
2836 TEMP021
2837 TEMP022
2838 TEMP023
2839 TEMP024
2840 TEMP025
2841 TEMP026
2842 TEMP027
2843 TEMP028
2844 TEMP029
2845 TEMP030
2846 TEMP031
2847 TEMP032
2848 TEMP033
2849 TEMP034
2850 TEMP035
2851 TEMP036
2852 TEMP037
2853 TEMP038
2854 TEMP039
2855 TEMP040
2856 TEMP041
2857 TEMP042
2858 TEMP043
2859 TEMP044
2860 TEMP045
2861 TEMP046
2862 TEMP047
2863 TEMP048
2864 TEMP049
2865 TEMP050
2866 TEMP051
2867 TEMP052
2868 TEMP053
2869 TEMP054
2870 TEMP055
2871 TEMP056
2872 TEMP057
2873 TEMP058
2874 TEMP059
2875 TEMP060
2876 TEMP061
2877 TEMP062
2878 TEMP063
2879 TEMP064
2880 TEMP065
 165 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Signal list
2881 TEMP066
2882 TEMP067
2883 TEMP068
2884 TEMP069
2885 TEMP070
2886 TEMP071
2887 TEMP072
2888 TEMP073
2889 TEMP074
2890 TEMP075
2891 TEMP076
2892 TEMP077
2893 TEMP078
2894 TEMP079
2895 TEMP080
2896 TEMP081
2897 TEMP082
2898 TEMP083
2899 TEMP084
2900 TEMP085
2901 TEMP086
2902 TEMP087
2903 TEMP088
2904 TEMP089
2905 TEMP090
2906 TEMP091
2907 TEMP092
2908 TEMP093
2909 TEMP094
2910 TEMP095
2911 TEMP096
2912 TEMP097
2913 TEMP098
2914 TEMP099
2915 TEMP100
2916 TEMP101
2917 TEMP102
2918 TEMP103
2919 TEMP104
2920 TEMP105
2921 TEMP106
2922 TEMP107
2923 TEMP108
2924 TEMP109
2925 TEMP110
2926 TEMP111
2927 TEMP112
2928 TEMP113
2929 TEMP114
2930 TEMP115
2931 TEMP116
2932 TEMP117
2933 TEMP118
2934 TEMP119
2935 TEMP120
2936 TEMP121
2937 TEMP122
2938 TEMP123
2939 TEMP124
2940 TEMP125
2941 TEMP126
2942 TEMP127
2943 TEMP128
2944 TEMP129
2945 TEMP130
2946 TEMP131
2947 TEMP132
2948 TEMP133
2949 TEMP134
2950 TEMP135
 166 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Signal list
2951 TEMP136
2952 TEMP137
2953 TEMP138
2954 TEMP139
2955 TEMP140
2956 TEMP141
2957 TEMP142
2958 TEMP143
2959 TEMP144
2960 TEMP145
2961 TEMP146
2962 TEMP147
2963 TEMP148
2964 TEMP149
2965 TEMP150
2966 TEMP151
2967 TEMP152
2968 TEMP153
2969 TEMP154
2970 TEMP155
2971 TEMP156
2972 TEMP157
2973 TEMP158
2974 TEMP159
2975 TEMP160
2976 TEMP161
2977 TEMP162
2978 TEMP163
2979 TEMP164
2980 TEMP165
2981 TEMP166
2982 TEMP167
2983 TEMP168
2984 TEMP169
2985 TEMP170
2986 TEMP171
2987 TEMP172
2988 TEMP173
2989 TEMP174
2990 TEMP175
2991 TEMP176
2992 TEMP177
2993 TEMP178
2994 TEMP179
2995 TEMP180
2996 TEMP181
2997 TEMP182
2998 TEMP183
2999 TEMP184
3000 TEMP185
3001 TEMP186
3002 TEMP187
3003 TEMP188
3004 TEMP189
3005 TEMP190
3006 TEMP191
3007 TEMP192
3008 TEMP193
3009 TEMP194
3010 TEMP195
3011 TEMP196
3012 TEMP197
3013 TEMP198
3014 TEMP199
3015 TEMP200
3016 TEMP201
3017 TEMP202
3018 TEMP203
3019 TEMP204
3020 TEMP205
 167 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Signal list
3021 TEMP206
3022 TEMP207
3023 TEMP208
3024 TEMP209
3025 TEMP210
3026 TEMP211
3027 TEMP212
3028 TEMP213
3029 TEMP214
3030 TEMP215
3031 TEMP216
3032 TEMP217
3033 TEMP218
3034 TEMP219
3035 TEMP220
3036 TEMP221
3037 TEMP222
3038 TEMP223
3039 TEMP224
3040 TEMP225
3041 TEMP226
3042 TEMP227
3043 TEMP228
3044 TEMP229
3045 TEMP230
3046 TEMP231
3047 TEMP232
3048 TEMP233
3049 TEMP234
3050 TEMP235
3051 TEMP236
3052 TEMP237
3053 TEMP238
3054 TEMP239
3055 TEMP240
3056 TEMP241
3057 TEMP242
3058 TEMP243
3059 TEMP244
3060 TEMP245
3061 TEMP246
3062 TEMP247
3063 TEMP248
3064 TEMP249
3065 TEMP250
3066 TEMP251
3067 TEMP252
3068 TEMP253
3069 TEMP254
3070 TEMP255
3071 TEMP256
 168 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Appendix C
Variable Timer List
 169 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Variable Timer List
Timer Timer No. Contents
T1OC 1 1OC TRIP TIMER

(T4OC) 4 (4OC TRIP TIMER)
T1REF 5 1REF TRIP TIMER
T1EF 6 1EF TRIP TIMER
TVFH 11 V/F-H TRIP TIMER
TVFA 12 V/F-A ALARM TIMER
TFRQL 13 FRQ-L TRIP TIMER
TFRQH 14 FRQ-H TRIP TIMER
TFRQA 15 FRQ-A ALARM TIMER
 170 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Appendix D
Binary Output Default Setting List
 171 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Binary Output Default Setting List
Relay Module BO No. Signal Name Contents Setting

Model Name Signal No. Logic Timer
(OR: 1, AND: 2) (OFF: 0, ON: 1)
GRT100 IO2 BO1 TRIP-1 TRIP First 284 1 1

-101 BO2 TRIP-2 TRIP Second 291 1 1
BO3 DIFT DIFT relay operating 224 1 1
BO4 1OC, 1OCI 1OC or 1OCI relay operating 129, 225 1 1
BO6 1REF, 1EF, 1EFI 1REF, 1EF or 1EFI relay operating 173, 174, 73 1 1
BO8 FRQ FRQ relay operating 230 1 1
BO9 V/F V/F-L, H relay operating 229 1 1
BO10 V/F-A V/F-A relay operating 242 1 1
BO11 THR THR-L, H relay operating 83 1 1
BO12 THR-A THR-A relay operating 248 1 1
BO13 EXT_MEC.TP1, 2, 3, 4 External mechanical relay trip 1536, 1537, 1538, 1539 1 1

BO6 1REF 1REF relay operating 173 1 1
BO8 1EF, 1EFI 1EF or 1EFI relay operating 174, 73 1 1
BO11 V/F-T V/F-T relay operating 81 1 1
BO12 V/F-H V/F-H relay operating 235 1 1
IO3 BO1 THR THR-L, H relay operating 83 1 1

BO3 TRIP-1 TRIP First 284 1 1
BO4 TRIP-2 TRIP Second 291 1 1
BO5 TRIP-1 TRIP First 284 1 1
BO6 TRIP-2 TRIP Second 291 1 1
BO7 EXT_MEC. TP1 External mechanical relay trip 1 1536 1 1

BO13 EXT_MEC.TP1, 2, 3, 4 External mechanical relay trip 1536, 1537, 1538, 1539 1 1
 172 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

Model Name
Signal No. Logic Timer
(OR: 1, AND: 2) (OFF: 0, ON: 1)

BO3 TRIP-3 TRIP Third 298 1 1
BO5 1OC, 1OCI, 1REF, 1EF, 1OC, 1OCI, 1REF, 1EF or 1EFI relay 129, 225, 173, 174, 73 1 1
1EFI operating
2EFI operating
3EFI operating
BO13 EXT_MEC. TP1, 2, 3, 4 External mechanical relay trip 1536, 1537, 1538, 1539 1 1

IO3 BO1 FRQ FRQ relay operating 230 1 1

 173 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

Model Name Signal No. Logic Timer
(OR: 1, AND: 2) (OFF: 0, ON: 1)

1EFI operating
2EFI operating
3EFI operating
BO13 EXT_MEC. TP1, 2, 3, 4 External mechanical relay trip 1536, 1537, 1538, 1539 1 1

IO3 BO1 FRQ FRQ relay operating 230 1 1

 174 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Appendix E
Details of Relay Menu and
LCD & Button Operation
 175 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
MENU
1=Record 2=Status
3=Setting(view) 4=Setting(change)
5=Test
/1 Record
/2 Fault record /3 Fault record 2/8 /4 Fault record #2 3/33

1=Display 2=Clear #1 16/Oct/1998 23:18:03.913 16/Oct/1998 23:18:03.913
#2 12/Feb/1998 03:51:37.622 Phase BC Trip ABC
#3 30/Jan/1997 15:06:11.835 DIFT
/2 Fault record
Clear all fault records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
/2 Event record /3 Event record 2/48

1=Display 2=Clear 16/Oct/1998 23:18:04.294 Trip Off
16/Oct/1998 23:18:03.913 Trip On
12/Feb/1998 03:51:37.622 Rly.set change
/2 Event record
Clear all event records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
/2 Disturbance record /3 Disturbance record 1/ 11

1=Display 2=Clear #1 16/Oct/1998 23:18:03.913
#2 12/Feb/1998 03:51:37.622
#3 30/Jan/1997 15:06:11.835
/2 Disturbance record
Clear all disturbance records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
/1 Status /2 Metering 12/Feb/1998 22:56 3/13

1=Metering 2=Binary I/O Ia1 ***.*kA ***.* Ia2 **.**kA ***.*
3=Relay element 4=Time sync source Ib1 ***.*kA ***.* Ib2 **.**kA ***.*
5=Clock adjustment Ic1 ***.*kA ***.* Ic2 **.**kA ***.*
/2 Binary input & output 3/ 5

Input (IO#1) [000 000 000 000 000]
Input (IO#2) [000 ]
Output(IO#1-trip)[000 00 ]
/2 Relay element 3/ 9
DIFT [000 000 000 000 ]
REF [000 ]
OC [000 000 000 00 ]
/2 Time synchronization source

*IRIG: Active
RSM: Inactive
IEC: Inactive
/2 12/Feb/1998 22:56:19 [local] 1/5

Minute ( 0 - 59) : 56 _
Hour ( 0 - 23) : 22
Day ( 1 - 31) : 12
a-1
 176 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
a-1
/1 Setting(view)
1=Version 2=Description 3=Comm.
/2 Relay version
Serial No.: ********************
Main software: ********************
PLC data: ********************
/2 Description
Plant name: ********************
Description: ********************
/2 Communication /3 Address 1/ 1
1=Address HDLC ( 1 ) IEC ( 2 )
2=Switch
/3 Switch 3/ 3
232C 1=9.6 2=19.2 3=38.4 4=57.6 1
IECBR 1=9.6 2=19.2 2
/2 Record /3 Fault record 1/1

1=Fault record 2= Event record Phase mode 1=Operating 2=Fault 1
/3 Event record 0=None 3=Both 3/13

Mech.trip 1 1=Operate 2=Reset 3
/3 Disturbance record /4 Record time & starter 3/ 4

1=Record time & starter Time ( 3.0 s ) 1OCPS( 0.10 pu )
2=Scheme switch 2OCPS( 0.10 pu ) 3OCPS( 0.10 pu )
1OCPG( 0.10 pu ) 2OCPG( 0.10 pu )
/4 Scheme switch 1/11

TRIP1 0=Off 1=On 0
TRIP2 0=Off 1=On 0
TRIP3 0=Off 1=On 0
/2 Status /3 Metering 1/ 1
1=Metering Display value 1=Primary 2=Secondary 1
2=Time Synchronization
3=Time zone
/3 Time synchronization 1/ 1
Sync 0=Off 1=IRIG 2=RSM 3=IEC 1
/3 Time zone 1/ 1
GMT ( +9 hrs )
a-1, b-1
 177 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
a-1 b-1
/2 Protection (Active group= *)

1=Group1 2=Group2 3=Group3 4=Group4
/3 Protection (Group 1)
2=Trip
/4 Transformer parameter (Group 1) /5 VT & CT ratio 3/ 4

1= VT & CT ratio 1CT ( 2000 ) 2CT ( 1500 )
3CT ( 1500 ) 1nCT ( 1000 )
2nCT ( 500 ) 3nCT ( 2000 )
/4 Trip (Group 1) /5 Scheme switch 3/

1=Scheme switch DIFTPMD 1=3POR 2=1P 1
2=Protection element 1REF 1=1IO 2=2IO 3=3IO 1
2REF 1=1IO 2=2IO 3=3IO 1
/5 Protection element (Group 1) /6 DIFT 3/ 7

1=DIFT 2=REF 3=OC ik ( 0.10 pu ) p1 ( 10 % )
4=THR 5=V/F 6=FRQ p2 ( 50 % ) kp ( 1.00 pu )
kct1 ( 0.50 ) kct2 ( 0.50 )
/6 REF 3/11
1ik ( 0.50 pu ) 1kct1( 1.00 )
1kct2( 1.00 ) 1kct3( 1.00 )
1p2 ( 10 % ) 1kp ( 1.00pu )
/6 OC 3/12
1OC ( 0.10 pu ) 2OC ( 0.10 pu )
3OC ( 0.10 pu ) T1OC ( 10.00 s )
T2OC ( 10.00 s ) T3OC ( 10.00 s )
/6 THR 3/ 3
 ( 0.5 min) k ( 0.10 )
IB ( 1.00 pu ) lp ( 0.10 pu )
TA ( 0 min)
/6 V/F 3/ 5
V ( 100.0 V ) A ( 1.10 pu )
L ( 1.20 pu ) H ( 1.30 pu )
LT ( 1 s ) HT ( 3 s )
1=Transformer parameter /6 FRQ 3/ 3
2=Trip 81-1 ( 45.00 Hz ) 81-2 ( 55.00 Hz )
UV ( 40 V ) TFRQL( 1.00 s )
TFRQH( 1.00 s ) TFRQA( 1.00 s )
2=Trip
/2 Binary input 1=Norm 2=Inv 3/ 8

BISW 1 1
BISW 2 1
BISW 3 1
/2 Binary output /3 Binary output (IO2) 3/13

1=IO#2 2=IO#3 BO1 ( 1, 100, 0, 0, 0, 0)AND,
BO2 ( 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0) OR,
BO3 ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) OR,
/3 Binary output (IO3) 3/10

BO1 ( 1, 100, 0, 0, 0, 0)AND,
BO2 ( 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0) OR,
BO3 ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) OR,
a-1 b-1
 178 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
a-1 b-1
/2 LED 2/ 2
LED1 ( 21 ) LED2 ( 4 )
LED3 ( 67 ) LED4 ( 0 ) : Password trap
Password
Input password [_ ]
/1 Setting(change)
1=Password 2=Description 3=Comm.
4=Record 5=Status 6=Protection : Confirmation trap
/2 *************
Change settings?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
/2 Password
Input new password [ _ ]
Retype new password [ ]
/2 Description /3 Plant name [ _ ]

1=Plant name 2=Description ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ()[]@_ 
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{}*/+-<=> 
0123456789!”#$%&’:;,.^  
/3 Description [ _ ]
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ()[]@_ 
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{}*/+-<=> 
0123456789!”#$%&’:;,.^  
/2 Communication /3 Address 1/ 2
1=Address HDLC ( 1- 32): 1_
2=Switch IEC ( 0- 254): 2
/3 Switch 1/ 3
232C 1=9.6 2=19.2 3=38.4 4=57.6 1 _
IECBR 1=9.6 2=19.2 2
/2 Record /3 Fault record 1/1

1=Fault record 2=Event record Phase mode 1=Operating 2=Fault 1 _
/3 Event record 0= None 3=Both 1/16

Mech.trip1 1=Operate 2=Reset 3 _
Mech.trip2 1=Operate 2=Reset 3
Mech.trip3 1=Operate 2=Reset 3
/3 Disturbance record /4 Record time & starter 1/ 7

1=Record time & starter Time ( 0.1- 3.0): 2.0 _ s
2=Scheme switch 1OCPS( 0.10- 20.00): 0.10 pu
2OCPS( 0.10- 20.00): 0.10 pu
/4 Scheme switch 1/16

TRIP1 0=Off 1=On 1 _
TRIP2 0=Off 1=On 1
TRIP3 0=Off 1=On 1
/2 Status /3 Metering 1/ 1
1=Metering Display value 1=Primary 2=Secondary 1_
2=Time Synchronization
3=Time zone
/3 Time synchronization 1/ 1
Sync 0=Off 1=IRIG 2=RSM 3=IEC 1 _
/3 Time zone 1/ 1
GMT ( -12 - +12): +9 _ hrs
a-1 b-2
 179 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
a-1 b-2
/2 Protection
1=Change active group
2=Change setting
3=Copy group
/3Change active group(Active group= *)

Current No.= * Select No.= _
/3 Change setting (Active group= *)

2=Trip
/5 Transformer parameter (Group 1) /6 VT & CT ratio 1/ 7

1=VT & CT ratio 1CT ( 1- 20000): 2000 _
2CT ( 1- 20000): 1000
3CT ( 1- 20000): 400
/5 Trip (Group 1) /6 Scheme switch 1/

1=Scheme switch DIFTPMD 1=3POR 2=1P 1_
2=Protection element 1REF 1=1IO 2=2IO 3=3IO 1
2REF 1=1IO 2=2IO 3=3IO 1
/6 Protection element (Group= 1) /7 DIFT 1/13

1=DIFT 2=REF 3=OC ik ( 0.10- 1.00): 0.10 _ pu
4=THR 5=V/F 6=FRQ p1 ( 10- 100): 10 %
p2 ( 10- 200): 100 %
/7 REF 1/21
1ik ( 0.05- 0.50): 0.05 _ pu
1kct1( 1.00- 50.00): 1.00
1kct2( 1.00- 50.00): 1.00
/7 OC 1/24
1OC ( 0.10- 20.00): 0.10 _ pu
2OC ( 0.10- 20.00): 0.10 pu
3OC ( 0.10- 20.00): 0.10 pu
/7 THR 1/ 5
 ( 0.5- 500.0): 0.5 _ min
k ( 0.10- 4.00): 0.10
IB ( 0.50- 2.50): 0.50 pu
/7 V/F 1/ 9
V ( 100.0- 120.0): 100.0_ V
A ( 1.03- 1.30): 1.10 pu
L ( 1.05- 1.30): 1.20 pu
/7 FRQ 1/ 6
81-1 ( 45.00- 55.00): 45.00_ Hz
81-2 ( 45.00- 55.00): 45.00 Hz
2=Trip
UV ( 40- 100): 40 V
1=Transformer parameters
2=Trip
/3 Copy groupA to B (Active group= 1)

A ( 1- 8): _
B ( 1- 8):
a-1 b-2 c-1
 180 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
a-1 b-2
/2 Binary input 1=Norm 2=Inv 1/ 8

BISW 1 1 _
BISW 2 1
BISW 3 1
/2 Binary output /3 Binary output (IO2 )

1=IO#2 2=IO#3 Select BO ( 1- 13)
Select No.= _
/4 Setting (BO 1 of IO2 ) /5 Logic gate type & delay timer 1/ 2

1=Logic gate type & delay timer Logic 1=OR 2=AND 1 _
2=Input to logic gate BOTD 0=Off 1=On 1
/5 Input to logic gate 3/ 6

/4 Setting (BO 12 of IO2 )
In #1 ( 0 - 3071): 21 _
1=Logic gate type & delay timer
In #2 ( 0 - 3071): 4
2=Input to logic gate
In #3 ( 0 - 3071): 67
/3 Binary output (IO3)

Select BO ( 1- 10)
Select No.= _
/2 LED 1/ 4
LED1 ( 0 - 3071): 21 _
LED2 ( 0 - 3071): 4
LED3 ( 0 - 3071): 67
/1 Test /2 Switch 1/ 3
1=Switch 2=Binary output A.M.F. 0=Off 1=On 1 _
3=Timer 4=Logic circuit Reset 0=Off 1=On 0
IECTST 0=Off 1=On 0
/2 Binary output
1=IO#1 2=IO#2 3=IO#3
/3 BO (0=Disable 1=Enable) 1/ 5 /3 BO
IO#1 TP-1: 1 _ Keep pressing 1 to operate.
IO#1 TP-2: 1
IO#1 TP-3: 1 Press CANCEL to cancel.
/3 BO (0=Disable 1=Enable) 1/ 10
IO#3 BO1: 1 _
IO#3 BO2: 1
IO#3 BO3: 1
/2 Timer 1/ 1 /2 Timer
Timer( 1 - 15): 1 _ Press ENTER to operate.
/2 Timer
Operating . . .
Press END to reset.
TermA( 0 - 3071): 1 _
TermB( 0 - 3071): 48
 181 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
LCD AND BUTTON OPERATION INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
MODE
1. PRESS ARROW KEY TO MOVE TO EACH DISPLAYED
ITEMS
NORMAL
2. PRESS "END" KEY TO BACK TO PREVIOUS SCREEN
(DISPLAY OFF)
1=RECORD
PRESS ANY
BUTTON
EXCEPT FOR MENU 1=FAULT RECORD
VIEW "VIEW" AND ( DISPLAY ON )
"RESET"
2=EVENT RECORD
3=DISTURBANCE RECORD
METERING 1
( DISPLAY ON )
2=STATUS
VIEW RESET
1=METERING
2=BINARY INPUT&OUTPUT
METERING 2 AUTO- 3=RELAY ELELMENT

( DISPLAY ON )
MODE 1 4=TIME SYNC SOURCE
TRIP OUTPUT 5=CLOCK ADJUSTMENT

ISSUED !
VIEW RESET
TRIP 3=SETTING
( LED ON ) (VIEW)
1=RELAY VERSION
2=DESCRIPTION
LATEST FAULT * AUTO-
( DISPLAY ON ) 3=RSM COMMUNICATION
MODE 2
4=RECORD
RELAY
FAILED ! 5=STATUS
VIEW RESET
ALARM 6=PROTECTION
( LED ON )
7=BINARY INPUT
8=BINARY OUTPUT
AUTO SUPERVISON *
9=LED
( DISPLAY ON )
*. "LATEST FAULT" AND "AUTO
SUPERVISION" SCREEN IS 4=SETTING
DISPLAYED ONLY IF DATA (CHANGE) Same as SETTING (VIEW) menu
IS STORED
VIEW RESET
5=TEST
1=SWITCH
2=BINARY OUTPUT
3=TIMER
4=LOGIC CIRCUIT
 182 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Appendix F
Case Outline
 Flush Mount Type
 Rack Mount Type
 183 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
266
28
254 2 276.2 32
Front View Side view
4-5.5
190.5 260
6.2 223 34.75
235.4
Rear view Panel cut-out
TB3/TB4 TB2
A1 B1 A1 B1
TB2-TB4:
M3.5 Ring
terminal
TB1:
TB1
M3.5 Ring
1 2 terminal
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
A10 B10 11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
25 26
27 28
A18 B18 29 30
Terminal block
Case Outline : Flush Mount Type
 184 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
279
Attachment kit
(top bar)
Attachment kit Attachment kit

(large bracket) (small bracket)
Top View
4 HOLES - 6.8x10.3
TRANSFORMER PROTECTION
2 6 5. 9
GRT100
201B-11-10
1A
100/110/115/120V
3 7. 7
465.1
483.0
Front View
Case Outline: Rack Mount Type
 185 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
132
265.9
265.9
247.8 19.4 18.8
(a) Large Bracket (b) Small Bracket

18
216
(c) Bar for Top and Bottom of Relay
Parts
(a) 1 Large bracket, 5 Round head screws with spring washers and washers (M4x10)
(b) 1 Small bracket, 3 Countersunk head screws (M4x6)
(c) 2 Bars, 4 Countersunk head screws (M3x8)
Dimensions of Attachment Kit EP-101
 186 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
How to Mount Attachment Kit for Rack-Mounting

Caution: Be careful that the relay modules or terminal blocks, etc., are not damage while mounting.
Tighten screws to the specified torque according to the size of screw.
Step 1.
Remove case cover.

GPS ALARM
SYNC. ALARM
MODE 2A
CF
Right bracket
Left bracket
Seal
Step 2.
Screw
Remove the left and right brackets by

unscrewing the three screws respectively,
then remove two screws on left side of the
GPS ALARM
SYNC. ALARM
MODE 2A
relay.
CF
And then, remove four seals on the top

and bottom of the relay.
Seal
Step 3 Top bar

Mount the small bracket by screwing three
countersunk head screws(M4x6) and apply
adhesives to the screws to prevent them
from loosening.
Mount the large bracket by five round head
screws(M4x10) with washer and spring
GPS ALARM
SYNC. ALARM
MODE 2A
CF
washer.
And then, mount the top and bottom bars by
two countersunk head screws(M3x8)
respectively.
Small bracket
Large bracket Bottom bar
Step 4
Completed.
GPS ALARM
SYNC. ALARM
MODE 2A
CF
 187 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
 188 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Appendix G
External Connections
 189 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
TB3-A2
BO1
A1
TB1 -1
2 BO2
B1
43 BO3
CT 5 B2
6
A3
CB
VT BO4 B3
A4
CT
IO#2 BO5 B4
7 A5
8 BO6 B5
CT A6
CB BO7 B6
CT A7
9
BO8 B7
10
11
12 A8
13
14 BO9 B8
15
16 A9
BO10 B9
27
28 A10
30
BO11 B10
(FRAME EARTH)
A11
BO12 B11 (HIGH SPEED
(+) RELAY)
A13
TB4 -A4 RELAY)
B4
BI1
MECHANICAL A5 BI2 FAIL A12
TRIP BI3
B5 B12 RELAY FAILURE TB3-A18 For IEC103
BI4 COM2-A
A6
INDICATION RESET BI5 COM2-B A17
B6 IO#1 A16
A7
BI6 COM2-0V
Dual RS485 I/F ports
BI7 COM1-A B18
B7
BI8 COM1-B B17
A8
BI9 COM1-0V B16 For RSM100
B8 TB3-A18
A9 BI10 COM-A
BI11 B18 RS485 I/F
B9
BI12 A17 (single RS485 port)
A10 COM-B
BI13 B17
(-) B11 A16
TB3-A14 0V
BI14 B16
B14
EVENT BI15 IO#2
A15 IO module
(-) B15 BI16
IRIG-B IO#1 IO1
TB4-A1 IO#2 IO2
B1 TRIP-1
IO#2 TB4 TB3 CN1
A2 A1 B1 IRIG-B
RELAY FAIL. B2 TRIP-2
1 E
DD FAIL. A3 TB1
1 2
TB4 -A16 +5Vdc B3 TRIP-3
DC (+) DC-DC
B16 A12
SUPPLY 0V
(-) A17
B17 B12 TRIP-4 A18 B18
29 30
A18 A13 IO#1 IO#2
(1)These connections are connected B18 VCT
(1)
by short-links before shipment. A15 B13 TRIP-5
B15 Terminal Block Arrangement (Rear view)
E (CASE EARTH)
Typical External Connection of Model 101
 190 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
TB2-A1
TB3-A2 BO1
B1
BO1
TB1 -1
A1
A2
2 BO2
B1 BO2
43 B2
CT BO3
5 B2
6 A3
A3 BO3
CB B3
VT BO4 B3
A4
CT A4
BO4
IO#2 B4
BO5 B4
7 A5 A5
BO5
8 BO6 B5 B5
CT A6 A6
CB BO7 B6 BO6
B6
CT A7
9 A7
10 BO8 B7
BO7
11
12 B7
13 A8
14 BO9 A8
B8
15 BO8
16 A9 B8
27 BO10 B9 A9
28 BO9
30
A10 B9
(FRAME EARTH) BO11 B10
A10
A11
BO10
B11 (HIGH SPEED B10
BO12
(+) RELAY)
A13 IO#3
TB4 -A4 RELAY)
B4
BI1
MECHANICAL A5 BI2
TRIP BI3 FAIL A12
B5 TB3-A18 For IEC103
BI4 RELAY FAILURE COM2-A
A6 B12 A17
INDICATION RESET COM2-B
BI5
B6 COM2-0V A16
A7
BI6 Dual RS485 I/F ports
COM1-A B18
B7
BI7
IO#1 COM1-B B17
BI8
A8
B8 TB3-A18
BI10 COM-A
A9
B18 RS485 I/F
B9 BI11
A17 (single RS485 port)
A10
BI12 COM-B
BI13 B17
A16 IO module
(-) B11 0V
TB3-A14 B16
BI14 IO#1 IO1
B14
EVENT BI15 IO#2
A15 IO#2 IO2
(-) B15 BI16
IRIG-B
IO#3 IO3
TB4-A1
IO#2 B1 TRIP-1
A2 TB4 TB3 TB2 CN1
A1 B1 A1 B1 IRIG-B
RELAY FAIL. B2 TRIP-2
1
E
DD FAIL. A3 TB1
TB4 -A16
+5Vdc B3 TRIP-3 A10 B10
1 2
DC (+) B16 DC-DC
A12 IO#3
SUPPLY 0V
(-) A17
B17 B12 TRIP-4 A18 B18
A18 A13 29 30
B18 IO#1 IO#2
(1)These connections are connected (1) VCT
by short-links before shipment. A15 B13 TRIP-5
B15 Terminal Block Arrangement (Rear view)
E (CASE EARTH)
 191 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
TB1 -1 TB3-A2
2
BO1
A1
43
CT 5 BO2
B1
6
BO3
CB B2
VT
A3
CT
BO4 B3
7 A4
BO5 B4
8
CT A5
CB BO6 B5
CT A6
9
IO#2 BO7 B6
10
11 A7
12
13
BO8 B7
14
15 A8
16
BO9 B8
27
28 A9
30
BO10 B9
(FRAME EARTH)
A10
(+) BO11 B10
[Default Setting] TB4 -B4
A4 BI1 A11
B11 (HIGH SPEED

B5 BO12
EXT. MECHANICAL TRIP A5 BI2 RELAY)
B6 A13
A6 BI3
BO13 B13
(HIGH SPEED
B7
BI4
RELAY)
A7
B8
INDICATION RESET BI5
A8
B9
FAIL A12 TB3-A18 For IEC103
PROTECTION BLOCK BI6 COM2-A
A9 B12 RELAY FAILURE A17
COM2-B
B10 IO#1
BI7 COM2-0V A16
A10
B11 COM1-A B18
A11 BI8 B17
COM1-B
B12
BI9 TB3-A18 COM1-0V B16 For RSM100
A12
B13 COM-A
B18
A13 BI10
B14 A17 RS485 I/F
BI11 COM-B
A14 B17 (Single RS485 port)
B15
BI12 A16
A15 0V
(-)
TB3 –A14 B16
BI14 IO module
EVENT B14
BI15 IO#2 IO#1 IO8
IRIG-B
A15
BI16
IO#2 IO2
(-) B15
TB4- A3
B3 (+)
TB4 TB3 CN1
A1 A1
TP-1 IRIG-B
IO#1 TRIP-1
TP-2 A2 E
RELAY FAIL. TRIP-2 TB1
1 2
≧1 TP-3 B2
DD FAIL. TRIP-3
TB4 -A16
(+) +5Vdc
DC () B16 A18
SUPPLY DC-DC IO#2 29 30
A17 IO#1 VCT
(-)
() B17
0V
A18 Terminal Block Arrangement (Rear view)
() B18
()This connection is connected by
short bar before shipment.
E CASE EARTH
 192 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
TB1 -1 TB3-A2
2 BO1
3 A1
CT 4
5 BO2
6 B1
CB BO3
7 B2
8
VT 910
A3
1112
BO4 B3
13
14 A4
IO#2
CT BO5 B4
CT
CB A5
CT 15
16 BO6 B5
17
18 A6
CB 1920 BO7 B6
CT 21
22 A7
23 BO8
24 B7
A8
BO9 B8
CT A9
27 BO10 B9
28 A10
30
BO11 B10
(FRAME EARTH)
A11
(+) RELAY)
A13
[Default Setting]
TB4 -A4 RELAY)
BI1
B4
EXT. MECHANICAL TRIP BI2
A5
BI3 TB3-A18 For IEC103
B5 FAIL A12 COM2-A
A6 BI4 COM2-B A17
INDICATION RESET BI5 B12 RELAY FAILURE A16
B6 COM2-0V
BI6 B18
A7 IO#1 COM1-A
B7
BI7 B17
COM1-B
BI8
A8 COM1-0V B16 For RSM100
BI9 TB3-A18
B8
BI10 COM-A
A9 B18 RS485 I/F
B9
BI11
A10
BI12 COM-B
BI13 B17
A16
(-) B11 0V
TB3-A14 B16
IO module
BI14
EVENT B14
BI15 IO#2 IO#1 IO1
A15
(-) B15
BI16 IO#2 IO2
IRIG-B
TB4 TB3 CN1

TB4-A1 A1 B1 IRIG-B
IO#2 B1 TRIP-1
E
A2
TB1
TRIP-2
B2 1 2
RELAY FAIL.
≧1
DD FAIL. A3
TB4 -A16
+5Vdc B3 TRIP-3 A18 B18
IO#2 29 30
(+) B16 IO#1
DC DC-DC A12 VCT
A17
SUPPLY
(-) 0V B12 TRIP-4 Terminal Block Arrangement (Rear view)
B17
A18 A13
(1)These connections are connected (1) B18 B13 TRIP-5
by short-bars before shipment. A15
B15
E (CASE EARTH)
 193 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
TB2-A1
TB1 -1 TB3-A2
2 BO1 BO1
A1 B1
3
CT 4
5 BO2 A2
B1
6 BO2
BO3 B2
CB B2
7
8 A3
VT 910 A3 BO3
B3
1112 BO4 B3
13 A4
14 A4
IO#2 BO4
BO5 B4 B4
CT
CT
A5 A5
CB
CT 15 BO6 BO5
16 B5 B5
17
A6
18 A6
CB 1920 BO7 B6 BO6
CT 21 B6
A7
22
23 BO8 A7
B7
24 BO7
A8 B7
BO9 B8 A8
A9 BO8
CT B8
27 BO10 B9
A9
28 A10 BO9
30 BO11 B9
B10
(FRAME EARTH)
A10
A11
BO10
BO12 B11 (HIGH SPEED B10
(+) RELAY)
A13
[Default Setting] IO#3
TB4 -A4 RELAY)
BI1
B4
EXT. MECHANICAL TRIP BI2
A5 TB3-A18 For IEC103
BI3 COM2-A
B5 FAIL A12 COM2-B A17
A6 BI4
INDICATION RESET RELAY FAILURE COM2-0V A16
BI5 B12
B6 Dual RS485 I/F ports
BI6 COM1-A B18
A7 IO#1
BI7 COM1-B B17
B7
A8
BI9 TB3-A18
B8
BI10 COM-A
A9 B18 RS485 I/F
B9 BI11
A10
BI12 COM-B
BI13 B17
A16 IO module
(-) B11 0V
TB3-A14 B16
BI14
EVENT B14 IO#1 IO1
BI15 IO#2
A15
BI16
IO#2 IO2
(-) B15 IRIG-B IO#3 IO3
TB4-A1
TB4 TB3 TB2 CN1
B1 TRIP-1
A1 B1 IRIG-B
IO#2
A2
E
TRIP-2
B2 TB1
RELAY FAIL. 1 2
≧1 B10
DD FAIL. A3 IO#3
TB4 -A16
+5Vdc B3 TRIP-3
A18
DC (+) B16 DC-DC A12 29 30
A17 IO#1 IO#2
SUPPLY VCT
(-) 0V B12 TRIP-4
B17
A18
(1)These connections are connected (1) B18 B13 TRIP-5
by short-bars before shipment. A15
B15
E (CASE EARTH)
 194 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
TB1 -1
2 TB3-A2
3 BO1
CT 4 A1
5
6 BO2
B1
CB
7 BO3
8 B2
VT 910
1112 A3
13 BO4 B3
14
A4
CT
CT BO5 B4
CB
CT 15 A5
16
17 BO6 B5
18
CB 1920 A6
CT 21 IO#2 BO7 B6
22
23 A7
24 BO8 B7
A8
BO9 B8
CT
A9
27
BO10 B9
28
30 A10
(+) A11
[Default Setting] TB4 -B4
BI1
A4 RELAY)
B5
EXT. MECHANICAL TRIP A13
A5 BI2
B6 BO13 B13
(HIGH SPEED
BI3 RELAY)
A6
B7
A7 BI4 TB3-A18 For IEC103
FAIL A12 COM2-A
B8
INDICATION RESET BI5 COM2-B A17
A8
B12
RELAY FAILURE
COM2-0V A16
B9
PROTECTION BLOCK BI6 Dual RS485 I/F ports
A9 COM1-A B18
B10 IO#1 B17
COM1-B
A10 BI7
COM1-0V B16 For RSM100
B11
A11 BI8 TB3-A18
B12 COM-A
BI9 B18
A12
B13 A17 RS485 I/F
A13 BI10 COM-B
B17 (Single RS485 port)
B14
A14 BI11 A16
0V
B15 B16
A15 BI12
(-) IO module
TB3 –A14
BI14 IO#1 IO8
IRIG-B
EVENT B14
BI15 IO#2 IO#2 IO2
A15 TB4- A3
BI16 B3 (+)
(-) B15
TB4 TB3 CN1
A1 A1
TP-1 IRIG-B
IO#1 TRIP-1
TP-2 A2 E
RELAY FAIL. TRIP-2 TB1
≧1 B2
1 2
TP-3
DD FAIL. TRIP-3
TB4 -A16
(+) +5Vdc
DC () B16 A18
SUPPLY DC-DC IO#2 29 30
A17 IO#1 VCT
(-)
() B17
0V
() B18
E CASE EARTH
 195 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
TB1 -1
TB2-A1
2 TB3-A2
3 BO1 BO1 B1
CT 4 A1
5
6 BO2 A2
B1
CB BO2
7 BO3 B2
8 B2
VT 910 A3
A3
1112 BO3 B3
13 BO4 B3
14 A4
A4
CT BO4
CT BO5 B4 B4
CB
CT 15 A5 A5
16
17 BO6 B5 BO5 B5
18
CB 1920
A6
A6
CT 21 IO#2 BO7 B6
BO6 B6
22
A7
23
24 BO8 B7 A7
BO7 B7
A8
BO9 B8 A8
CT
A9 BO8 B8
27
BO10 B9
28 A9
30 A10
BO9 B9
A11 A10
(+) BO12 B11 (HIGH SPEED

BO10 B10
[Default Setting] TB4 -B4 RELAY)
A4 BI1 A13
B5
EXT. MECHANICAL TRIP BO13 B13 (HIGH SPEED
A5 BI2
RELAY) IO#3
B6
A6 BI3
B7
FAIL A12 TB3-A18 For IEC103
A7 BI4
COM2-A
B8 B12 RELAY FAILURE A17
INDICATION RESET BI5
COM2-B
A8 A16
COM2-0V
B9
PROTECTION BLOCK BI6 B18
A9 COM1-A
B10 IO#1 COM1-B B17
A10 BI7
TB3-A18 COM1-0V B16 For RSM100
B11
BI8 COM-A
A11 B18
B12 RS485 I/F
A17
A12 BI9 (Single RS485 port)
COM-B
B13 B17
A13 BI10
A16
B14 0V IO module
A14 BI11 B16
B15 IO#1 IO8
A15 BI12 IO#2 IO2
(-)
TB3 –A14 IRIG-B IO#3 IO3
BI14
EVENT B14
BI15 IO#2 TB4- A3
(+)
A15 B3 TB4 TB3 TB2 CN1
A1 B1 IRIG-B
BI16
(-) TP-1 A1
B15 IO#1 TRIP-1 E
TP-2 A2 TB1
RELAY FAIL. TRIP-2 B10
1 2
≧1 IO#3
TP-3 B2
DD FAIL. TRIP-3
TB4 -A16 A18
(+) +5Vdc
DC () B16 IO#1 IO#2 29 30
SUPPLY DC-DC VCT

(-) A17
() B17 0V Terminal Block Arrangement (Rear view)
A18
() B18
E CASE EARTH
 196 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Appendix H
Relay Setting Sheet
1. Relay Identification
2. Contacts Setting
3. Relay and Protection Scheme Setting Sheet
 197 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Relay Setting Sheets
1. Relay Identification Date:

Relay type Serial Number
Frequency CT rating
VT rating dc supply voltage
Password
Active setting group
2. Contacts Setting
(1) IO#2 BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7
BO8
BO9
BO10
BO11
BO12
BO13
(2) IO#3 BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7
BO8
BO9
BO10
 198 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
3. Relay and Protection Scheme Setting Sheet

Standard Default Setting of Relay Series (50Hz / 60Hz)
№
N a m e R a n g e U n i t s C o n t e n t s 2 - W i n d i n g 3 - W i n d i n g
50Hz 60Hz 101 102 103 201 202 203 204

1 Active group 1-8 － Active setting group 1 1
2 1CT 1 -　20000 － CT ratio 2000 2000
3 2CT 1 -　20000 － ditto 2000 2000
4 3CT 1 -　20000 － ditto -- 2000 2000
5 1nCT 1 -　20000 － ditto 2000 2000
6 2nCT 1 -　20000 － ditto 400 400
7 3nCT 1 -　20000 － ditto -- 400 400
8 VT 1 -　20000 － VT ratio 400 400
9 DIFTPMD 3POR - 1P － DIF trip mode 3POR 3POR
10 1REF 1I0 - 2I0 － Transformer type for REF 1I0 -- --
1I0 - 2I0 - 3I0 -- 1I0 1I0
11 2REF 1I0 - 2I0 － ditto 1I0 -- --
1I0 - 2I0 - 3I0 -- 1I0 1I0
12 3REF 1I0 - 2I0 - 3I0 － ditto -- 1I0 1I0
13 M1OCI Long - Std - Very - Ext － OCI back-up trip Std Std
14 M2OCI Long - Std - Very - Ext － ditto Std Std
15 M3OCI Long - Std - Very - Ext － ditto -- Std Std
16 M1EFI Long - Std - Very - Ext － EFI back-up trip Std Std
17 M2EFI Long - Std - Very - Ext － ditto Std Std
18 M3EFI Long - Std - Very - Ext － ditto -- Std Std
19 L/O Off - On － Trip signal lock out Off Off
20 2F-LOCK Off - On － 2F restraint On On
21 5f-LOCK Off - On － 5F restraint On On
22 DIF1 Off - On － Current differential trip On On
23 DIF2 Off - On － ditto On On
24 DIF3 Off - On － ditto Off On On
25 DIF4 Off - On － ditto Off --
26 DIF5 Off - On － ditto Off --
27 1REF1 Off - On － Restricted earth fault trip On On
28 1REF2 Off - On － ditto On On
30 1REF4 Off - On － ditto Off --
32 1OC1 Off - On － OC trip On On
33 1OC2 Off - On － ditto Off Off
35 1OC4 Off - On － ditto Off --
37 1OCI1 Off - On － OCI trip On On
38 1OCI2 Off - On － ditto Off Off
40 1OCI4 Off - On － ditto Off --
42 1EF1 Off - On － EF trip On On
43 1EF2 Off - On － ditto Off Off
45 1EF4 Off - On － ditto Off --
47 1EFI1 Off - On － EFI trip On On
48 1EFI2 Off - On － ditto Off Off
49 1EFI3 Off - On － ditto Off Off
50 1EFI4 Off - On － ditto Off --
51 1EFI5 Off - On － ditto Off --
52 2REF1 Off - On － Restricted earth fault trip On On
57 2OC1 Off - On － OC trip Off Off
58 2OC2 Off - On － ditto On On
62 2OCI1 Off - On － OCI trip Off Off
63 2OCI2 Off - On － ditto On On
67 2EF1 Off - On － EF trip Off Off
68 2EF2 Off - On － ditto On On
 199 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Standard Def ault Setting of Relay Series (50Hz / 60Hz)

№ Name Range Units Contents 2-Winding 3-Winding
50Hz 60Hz 101 102 103 201 202 203 204
70 2EF4 Of f - On － ditto Of f --
71 2EF5 Of f - On － ditto Of f --
72 2EFI1 Of f - On － EFI trip Of f Of f
73 2EFI2 Of f - On － ditto On On
74 2EFI3 Of f - On － ditto Of f Of f
75 2EFI4 Of f - On － ditto Of f --
76 2EFI5 Of f - On － ditto Of f --
77 3REF1 Of f - On － Restricted earth f ault trip -- On On
78 3REF2 Of f - On － ditto -- On On
79 3REF3 Of f - On － ditto -- On On
80 3REF4 Of f - On － ditto -- Of f --
81 3REF5 Of f - On － ditto -- Of f --
82 3OC1 Of f - On － OC trip -- Of f Of f
83 3OC2 Of f - On － ditto -- Of f Of f
84 3OC3 Of f - On － ditto -- On On
85 3OC4 Of f - On － ditto -- Of f --
86 3OC5 Of f - On － ditto -- Of f --
87 3OCI1 Of f - On － OCI trip -- Of f Of f
88 3OCI2 Of f - On － ditto -- Of f Of f
89 3OCI3 Of f - On － ditto -- On On
90 3OCI4 Of f - On － ditto -- Of f --
91 3OCI5 Of f - On － ditto -- Of f --
92 3EF1 Of f - On － EF trip -- Of f Of f
93 3EF2 Of f - On － ditto -- Of f Of f
94 3EF3 Of f - On － ditto -- On On
95 3EF4 Of f - On － ditto -- Of f --
96 3EF5 Of f - On － ditto -- Of f --
97 3EFI1 Of f - On － EFI trip -- Of f Of f
98 3EFI2 Of f - On － ditto -- Of f Of f
99 3EFI3 Of f - On － ditto -- On On
100 3EFI4 Of f - On － ditto -- Of f --
101 3EFI5 Of f - On － ditto -- Of f --
102 FRQ-UF1 Of f - On － FRQ trip On On
103 FRQ-UF2 Of f - On － ditto On On
104 FRQ1 Of f - On － ditto On On
105 FRQ2 Of f - On － ditto On On
106 FRQ3 Of f - On － ditto Of f On On
107 FRQ4 Of f - On － ditto Of f --
108 FRQ5 Of f - On － ditto Of f --
109 FRQA Of f - On － ditto On On
110 V/F1 Of f - On － V/F trip On On
111 V/F2 Of f - On － ditto On On
112 V/F3 Of f - On － ditto Of f On On
113 V/F4 Of f - On － ditto Of f --
114 V/F5 Of f - On － ditto Of f --
115 V/FA Of f - On － ditto On On
116 THR1 Of f - On － THR trip On On
117 THR2 Of f - On － ditto On On
118 THR3 Of f - On － ditto Of f On On
119 THR4 Of f - On － ditto Of f --
120 THR5 Of f - On － ditto Of f --
121 THRA Of f - On － ditto On On
122 M.T1-1 Of f - On － Mechanical trip1 On On
123 M.T1-2 Of f - On － ditto On On
124 M.T1-3 Of f - On － ditto Of f On On
125 M.T1-4 Of f - On － ditto Of f --
 200 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

№
50Hz 60Hz 101 102 103 201 202 203 204

140 M.T4-5 Off - On － ditto Off --
141 SVCNT ALM&BLK - ALM － Super visor control ALM&BLK ALM&BLK
142 CTSEN Off - On － DIF output blocked by CT saturation Off Off
143 DIFT ik 0.10 - 1.00 pu Minimum operating current 0.30 0.30
144 p1 10 - 100 % % slope of small current region 100 100
145 p2 10 - 200 % % slope of large current region 200 200
146 kp 1.00 - 20.00 pu Break point of DIF characteristic 1.00 1.00
147 kct1 0.05 - 50.00 － CT ratio 1.00 1.00
148 kct2 0.05 - 50.00 － ditto 1.00 1.00
149 kct3 0.05 - 50.00 － ditto -- 1 1.00
150 yd_p 1-2 － Primary winding 2 2
151 yd_s 1-2 － Secondary winding 2 2
152 vec_s 0 - 11 － Phase angel(Secondary) 0 0
153 yd_t 1-2 － Tertiary winding -- 2 2
154 vec_t 0 - 11 － Phase angle(Tertiary) -- 0 0
155 k2f 10 - 50 % 2f restraint 15 15
156 k5f 10 - 100 % 5f restraint 30 30
157 kh 2.00 - 20.00 pu HOC operaing current 2.00 2.00
158 REF 1ik 0.05 - 0.50 pu Minimum sensitivity for 1REF 0.50 0.50
159 1kct1 1.00 - 50.00 － CT ratio for 1REF 1.00 1.00
160 1kct2 1.00 - 50.00 － ditto 1.00 1.00
161 1kct3 1.00 - 50.00 － ditto -- 1.00 1.00
162 1p2 50 - 100 % Percent slope for 1REF 100 100
163 1kp 0.50 - 2.00 pu DF2 sensitivity 1.00 1.00
164 2ik 0.05 - 0.50 pu Minimum sensitivity for 2REF 0.50 0.50
165 2kct1 1.00 - 50.00 － CT ratio for 2REF 1.00 1.00
166 2kct2 1.00 - 50.00 － ditto 1.00 1.00
167 2kct3 1.00 - 50.00 － ditto -- 1.00 1.00
168 2p2 50 - 100 % Percent slope for 2REF 100 100
169 2kp 0.50 - 2.00 pu DF2 sensitivity 1.00 1.00
170 3ik 0.05 - 0.50 pu Minimum sensitivity for 3REF -- 0.50 0.50
171 3kct1 1.00 - 50.00 － CT ratio for 3REF -- 1,00 1.00
172 3kct2 1.00 - 50.00 － ditto -- 1,00 1.00
173 3kct3 1.00 - 50.00 － ditto -- 1.00 1.00
174 3p2 50 - 100 % Percent slope for 3REF -- 100 100
175 3kp 0.50 - 2.00 pu DF2 sensitivity -- 1.00 1.00
176 T1REF 0.00 - 10.00 s 1REF delay trip timer 0.00 0.00
177 T2REF 0.00 - 10.00 s 2REF delay trip timer 0.00 0.00
178 T3REF 0.00 - 10.00 s 3REF delay trip timer -- 0.00 0.00
179 OC 1OC 0.10 - 20.00 pu OC element 2.00 2.00
180 2OC 0.10 - 20.00 pu ditto 2.00 2.00
181 3OC 0.10 - 20.00 pu ditto -- 2.00 2.00
182 T1OC 0.00 - 10.00 s OC delay trip timer 1.00 1.00
183 T2OC 0.00 - 10.00 s ditto 1.00 1.00
184 T3OC 0.00 - 10.00 s ditto -- 1.00 1.00
185 1OCI 0.10 - 5.00 pu OCI element 1.00 1.00
186 2OCI 0.10 - 5.00 pu ditto 1.00 1.00
187 3OCI 0.10 - 5.00 pu ditto -- 1.00 1.00
188 T1OCI 0.05 - 1.00 － OCI delayed tripping timer 1.00 1.00
189 T2OCI 0.05 - 1.00 － ditto 1.00 1.00
190 T3OCI 0.05 - 1.00 － ditto -- 1.00 1.00
191 1EF 0.10 - 20.00 pu EF element 2.00 2.00
192 2EF 0.10 - 20.00 pu ditto 2.00 2.00
193 3EF 0.10 - 20.00 pu ditto -- 2.00 2.00
194 T1EF 0.00 - 10.00 s EF delay trip timer 1.00 1.00
195 T2EF 0.00 - 10.00 s ditto 1.00 1.00
196 T3EF 0.00 - 10.00 s ditto -- 1.00 1.00
197 1EFI 0.10 - 5.00 pu EFI element 1.00 1.00
198 2EFI 0.10 - 5.00 pu ditto 1.00 1.00
199 3EFI 0.10 - 5.00 pu dittp -- 1.00 1.00
200 T1EFI 0.05 - 1.00 － EFI delayed tripping timer 1.00 1.00
201 T2EFI 0.05 - 1.00 － ditto 1.00 1.00
202 T3EFI 0.05 - 1.00 － ditto -- 1.00 1.00
203 THR t 0.5 - 500.0 min Time constant 60.0 60.0
204 k 0.10 - 4.00 － Constant 1.30 1.30
205 IB 0.50 - 2.50 pu Basic current 1.00 1.00
206 Ip 0.00 - 1.00 pu Pre-load current 0.00 0.00
207 TA 0 - 10 min Time for alarming 10 10
208 V/F V 100.0 - 120.0 V Voltage 100.0 100.0
209 A 1.03 - 1.30 pu Alarm level 1.03 1.03
210 L 1.05 - 1.30 pu Low level 1.05 1.05
211 H 1.10 - 1.40 pu High level 1.40 1.40
 201 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Standard Def ault Setting of Relay Series (50Hz / 60Hz)

№ Name Range Units Contents 2-Winding 3-Winding
50Hz 60Hz 101 102 103 201 202 203 204
211 H 1.10 - 1.40 pu High lev el 1.40 1.40
212 LT 1 - 600 s Inverce time delay for high level 600 600
213 HT 1 - 600 s Inverce time delay fir low level 1 1
214 RT 60 - 3600 s Radiant heat time 250 250
215 TVFH 1 - 600 s Delay time f or high lev el 10 10
216 TVFA 1 - 600 s Delay time f or alarm lev el 10 10
217 FRQ 81-1 45.00 - 55.00 54.00 - 66.00 Hz Frequency 49.00 / 59.00 49.00 / 59.00
218 81-2 45.00 - 55.00 54.00 - 66.00 Hz ditto 48.00 / 58.00 48.00 / 58.00
219 UV 40 - 100 v Voltage 40 40
220 TFRQL 0.00 - 60.00 s TRIP delay timer f or low lev el 10.0 10.0
221 TFRQH 0.00 - 60.00 s TRIP delay timer for high level 10.0 10.0
222 TFRQA 0.00 - 60.00 s TRIP delay timer for alarm level 10.0 10.0
223 BISW1 Norm - Inv － Binary input Norm Norm
224 BISW2 Norm - Inv － ditto Norm Norm
235 BISW13 Norm - Inv － ditto Norm --
239 LED1 0 - 3071 － Conf igrable　 LEDs 0 284
240 LED2 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 291
241 LED3 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 298
242 LED4 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 0
243 Plant name Specif ied by user － Plant name Specif ied by user Specif ied by user
244 Description ditto － Memorandum f or user Specif ied by user Specif ied by user
245 Address-HDLC 1 - 32 － Relay ID No. f or RSM 1 1
246 Address-IEC 1 - 254 － Relay ID No. f or IEC103 2 2
247 232C 9.6 - 19.2 - 38.4 - 57.6 － Comm. speed f or RSM 9.6 9.6
248 IECBR 9.6 - 19.2 － 19.2 19.2
249 IECBLK Normal - Block － Normal Normal
250 Phase mode Operating - Fault － Phase indication of Fault recording Operating Operating
251 Mech.trip1 None - Operate - Reset - Both － Ev ent record trigger Both Both
252 Mech.trip2 None - Operate - Reset - Both － ditto Both Both
255 Trip None - Operate - Reset - Both － ditto Both Both
256 Ind.Reset None - Operate - Reset - Both － ditto Both Both
257 Relay f ail None - Operate - Reset - Both － ditto Both Both
258 CT1 err None - Operate - Reset - Both － ditto Both Both
259 CT2 err None - Operate - Reset - Both － ditto Both Both
260 CT3 err None - Operate - Reset - Both － ditto -- Both Both
261 Ev ent1 None - Operate - Reset - Both － ditto Both Both
264 Sy s. Set change None - Operate － ditto Operate Operate
265 Rly . Set change None - Operate － ditto Operate Operate
266 Grp. Set change None - Operate － ditto Operate Operate
267 Time 0.1 - 3.0 s Disturbance record 1.0 1.0
268 1OCPS 0.10 - 20.00 pu OC element f or disturbance 1.00 1.00
269 2OCPS 0.10 - 20.00 pu recorder initiation 1.00 1.00
270 3OCPS 0.10 - 20.00 pu -- 1.00 1.00
271 1OCPG 0.05 - 20.00 pu 1.00 1.00
272 2OCPG 0.05 - 20.00 pu 1.00 1.00
273 3OCPG 0.05 - 20.00 pu -- 1.00 1.00
274 TRIP1 Of f - On － Disturbance trigger On On
275 TRIP2 Of f - On － ditto On On
276 TRIP3 Of f - On － ditto Of f On On
277 TRIP4 Of f - On － ditto Of f --
278 TRIP5 Of f - On － ditto Of f --
279 1OCPS Of f - On － ditto On On
280 2OCPS Of f - On － ditto On On
281 3OCPS Of f - On － ditto -- On On
 202 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

№
50Hz 60Hz 101 102 103 201 202 203 204

282 1OCPG Off - On － ditto On On
283 2OCPG Off - On － ditto On On
284 3OCPG Off - On － ditto -- On On
285 2F Off - On － ditto On On
286 5F Off - On － ditto On On
287 EVENT1 Off - On － ditto On On
290 Display value Primary - Secondary － Metering Primary Primary
291 Time sync Off - IRIG - RSM - IEC － Time Off Off
292 GMT -12 - +12 hour Time 0 0
 203 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
PLC default setting
Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip Flop

Cycle Flip Flop Timer
№ Signal Turn Model 100s Model 200s Back Release Off On One None
30 90 User Norm Time Value
Up Signal Delay Delay Shot
1536 EXT_MEC.TP1 X [513]BI1_COMMAND X
1540 IND.RESET X [517]BI5_COMMAND X
1541
1542
1543
1544
1545
1546
1547
1548
1549
1550
1551
1552 EVENT1 X [526]BI14_COMMAND X
1555
1556
1557
1558
1559
1560
1561
1562
1563
1564
1565
1566
1567
1568 PROT_BLOCK [518]BI6_COMMAND X
1569 DIF_BLOCK
1570 1REF_BLOCK
1571 1OC_BLOCK
1572 1OCI_BLOCK
1573 1EF_BLOCK
1574 1EFI_BLOCK
1575 2REF_BLOCK
1576 2OC_BLOCK
1577 2OCI_BLOCK
1578 2EF_BLOCK
1579 2EFI_BLOCK
1580 3REF_BLOCK
1581 3OC_BLOCK
1582 3OCI_BLOCK
1583 3EF_BLOCK
1584 3EFI_BLOCK
1585 4OC_BLOCK
1586 4OCI_BLOCK
1587 FRQ_BLOCK
1588 FRQ-A_BLOCK
1589 V/F_BLOCK
1590 V/F-A_BLOCK
1591 THR_BLOCK
1592 THR-A_BLOCK
1593 MEC.TP1_BLOCK
1594 MEC.TP2_BLOCK
1595 MEC.TP3_BLOCK
1596 MEC.TP4_BLOCK
1597
1598
1599
 204 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

1600 TP1_DELAY X [315]TP1 X 200 ms
1601 TP2_DELAY X [316]TP2 X 200 ms
1602 TP3_DELAY X [317]TP3 X 200 ms
1603 TP4_DELAY X [318]TP4 X 200 ms
1604 TP5_DELAY X [319]TP5 X 200 ms
1605
1606
1607
1608
1609
1610
1611
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616 DIF-A_BLOCK
1617 DIF-B_BLOCK
1618 DIF-C_BLOCK
1619
1620
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
1626
1627
1628
1629
1630
1631
1632
1633
1634
1635
1636
1637
1638
1639
1640
1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1648
1649
1650
1651
1652
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
1660
1661
1662
1663
 205 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

1664
1665
1666
1667
1668
1669
1670
1671
1672
1673
1674
1675
1676
1677
1678
1679
1680
1681
1682
1683
1684
1685
1686
1687
1688
1689
1690
1691
1692
1693
1694
1695
1696
1697
1698
1699
1700
1701
1702
1703
1704
1705
1706
1707
1708
1709
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1716
1717
1718
1719
1720
1721
1722
1723
1724
1725
1726
1727
 206 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

1728
1729
1730
1731
1732
1733
1734
1735
1736
1737
1738
1739
1740
1741
1742
1743
1744
1745
1746
1747
1748
1749
1750
1751
1752
1753
1754
1755
1756
1757
1758
1759
1760
1761
1762
1763
1764
1765
1766
1767
1768
1769
1770
1771
1772
1773
1774
1775
1776
1777
1778
1779
1780
1781
1782
1783
1784
1785
1786
1787
1788
1789
1790
1791
 207 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

1792 IO#1-TP1 X [284]TRIP-1 X
1793 IO#1-TP2 X [291]TRIP-2 X
1794 IO#1-TP3 X [298]TRIP-3 X
1795 IO#1-TP4 X [305]TRIP-4 X
1796 IO#1-TP5 X [312]TRIP-5 X
1797
1798
1799
1800
1801
1802
1803
1804
1805
1806
1807
1808
1809
1810
1811
1812
1813
1814
1815
1816
1817
1818
1819
1820
1821
1822
1823
1824
1825
1826
1827
1828
1829
1830
1831
1832
1833
1834
1835
1836
1837
1838
1839
1840
1841
1842
1843
1844
1845
1846
1847
1848
1849
1850
1851
1852
1853
1854
1855
 208 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

1856
1857
1858
1859
1860
1861
1862
1863
1864
1865
1866
1867
1868
1869
1870
1871
1872
1873
1874
1875
1876
1877
1878
1879
1880
1881
1882
1883
1884
1885
1886
1887
1888
1889
1890
1891
1892
1893
1894
1895
1896
1897
1898
1899
1900
1901
1902
1903
1904
1905
1906
1907
1908
1909
1910
1911
1912
1913
1914
1915
1916
1917
1918
1919
 209 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

1920
1921
1922
1923
1924
1925
1926
1927
1928
1929
1930
1931
1932
1933
1934
1935
1936
1937
1938
1939
1940
1941
1942
1943
1944
1945
1946
1947
1948
1949
1950
1951
1952
1953
1954
1955
1956
1957
1958
1959
1960
1961
1962
1963
1964
1965
1966
1967
1968
1969
1970
1971
1972
1973
1974
1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981
1982
1983
 210 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

1984
1985
1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2021
2022
2023
2024
2025
2026
2027
2028
2029
2030
2031
2032
2033
2034
2035
2036
2037
2038
2039
2040
2041
2042
2043
2044
2045
2046
2047
 211 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

2048
2049
2050
2051
2052
2053
2054
2055
2056
2057
2058
2059
2060
2061
2062
2063
2064
2065
2066
2067
2068
2069
2070
2071
2072
2073
2074
2075
2076
2077
2078
2079
2080
2081
2082
2083
2084
2085
2086
2087
2088
2089
2090
2091
2092
2093
2094
2095
2096
2097
2098
2099
2100
2101
2102
2103
2104
2105
2106
2107
2108
2109
2110
2111
 212 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

2112
2113
2114
2115
2116
2117
2118
2119
2120
2121
2122
2123
2124
2125
2126
2127
2128
2129
2130
2131
2132
2133
2134
2135
2136
2137
2138
2139
2140
2141
2142
2143
2144
2145
2146
2147
2148
2149
2150
2151
2152
2153
2154
2155
2156
2157
2158
2159
2160
2161
2162
2163
2164
2165
2166
2167
2168
2169
2170
2171
2172
2173
2174
2175
 213 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

2176
2177
2178
2179
2180
2181
2182
2183
2184
2185
2186
2187
2188
2189
2190
2191
2192
2193
2194
2195
2196
2197
2198
2199
2200
2201
2202
2203
2204
2205
2206
2207
2208
2209
2210
2211
2212
2213
2214
2215
2216
2217
2218
2219
2220
2221
2222
2223
2224
2225
2226
2227
2228
2229
2230
2231
2232
2233
2234
2235
2236
2237
2238
2239
 214 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

2240
2241
2242
2243
2244
2245
2246
2247
2248
2249
2250
2251
2252
2253
2254
2255
2256
2257
2258
2259
2260
2261
2262
2263
2264
2265
2266
2267
2268
2269
2270
2271
2272
2273
2274
2275
2276
2277
2278
2279
2280
2281
2282
2283
2284
2285
2286
2287
2288
2289
2290
2291
2292
2293
2294
2295
2296
2297
2298
2299
2300
2301
2302
2303
 215 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

2304
2305
2306
2307
2308
2309
2310
2311
2312
2313
2314
2315
2316
2317
2318
2319
2320
2321
2322
2323
2324
2325
2326
2327
2328
2329
2330
2331
2332
2333
2334
2335
2336
2337
2338
2339
2340
2341
2342
2343
2344
2345
2346
2347
2348
2349
2350
2351
2352
2353
2354
2355
2356
2357
2358
2359
2360
2361
2362
2363
2364
2365
2366
2367
 216 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

2368
2369
2370
2371
2372
2373
2374
2375
2376
2377
2378
2379
2380
2381
2382
2383
2384
2385
2386
2387
2388
2389
2390
2391
2392
2393
2394
2395
2396
2397
2398
2399
2400
2401
2402
2403
2404
2405
2406
2407
2408
2409
2410
2411
2412
2413
2414
2415
2416
2417
2418
2419
2420
2421
2422
2423
2424
2425
2426
2427
2428
2429
2430
2431
 217 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

2432
2433
2434
2435
2436
2437
2438
2439
2440
2441
2442
2443
2444
2445
2446
2447
2448
2449
2450
2451
2452
2453
2454
2455
2456
2457
2458
2459
2460
2461
2462
2463
2464
2465
2466
2467
2468
2469
2470
2471
2472
2473
2474
2475
2476
2477
2478
2479
2480
2481
2482
2483
2484
2485
2486
2487
2488
2489
2490
2491
2492
2493
2494
2495
 218 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

2486
2487
2488
2489
2490
2491
2492
2493
2494
2495
2496
2497
2498
2499
2500
2501
2502
2503
2504
2505
2506
2507
2508
2509
2510
2511
2512
2513
2514
2515
2516
2517
2518
2519
2520
2521
2522
2523
2524
2525
2526
2527
2528
2529
2530
2531
2532
2533
2534
2535
2536
2537
2538
2539
2540
2541
2542
2543
2544
2545
2546
2547
2548
2549
 219 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

2550
2551
2552
2553
2554
2555
2556
2557
2558
2559
2560
2561
2562
2563
2564
2565
2566
2567
2568
2569
2570
2571
2572
2573
2574
2575
2576
2577
2578
2579
2580
2581
2582
2583
2584
2585
2586
2587
2588
2589
2590
2591
2592
2593
2594
2595
2596
2597
2598
2599
2600
2601
2602
2603
2604
2605
2606
2607
2608
2609
2610
2611
2612
2613
 220 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

2614
2615
2616
2617
2618
2619
2620
2621
2622
2623
2624 F.RECORD1
2625 F.RECORD2
2626 F.RECORD3
2627 F.RECORD4
2628
2629
2630
2631
2632 D.RECORD1
2633 D.RECORD2
2634 D.RECORD3
2635 D.RECORD4
2636
2637
2638
2639
2640 SET.GROUP1
2641 SET.GROUP2
2642 SET.GROUP3
2643 SET.GROUP4
2644 SET.GROUP5
2645 SET.GROUP6
2646 SET.GROUP7
2647 SET.GROUP8
2648
2649
2650
2651
2652
2653
2654
2655
2656
2657
2658
2659
2660
2661
2662
2663
2664
2665
2666
2667
2668
2669
2670
2671
2672
2673
2674
2675
2676
2677
 221 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

2678
2679
2680
2681
2682
2683
2684
2685
2686 PROT_COM_RECV
2687
2688 TPLED_RST_RCV
2689
2690
2691
2692
2693
2694
2695
2696
2697
2698
2699
2700
2701
2702
2703
2704
2705
2706
2707
2708
2709
2710
2711
2712
2713
2714
2715
2716
2717
2718
2719
2720
2721
2722
2723
2724
2725
2726
2727
2728
2729
2730
2731
2732
2733
2734
2735
2736
2737
2738
2739
2740
2741
 222 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

2742
2743
2744
2745
2746
2747
2748
2749
2750
2751
2752
2753
2754
2755
2756
2757
2758
2759
2760
2761
2762
2763
2764
2765
2766
2767
2768
2769
2770
2771
2772
2773
2774
2775
2776
2777
2778
2779
2780
2781
2782
2783
2784
2785
2786
2787
2788
2789
2790
2791
2792
2793
2794
2795
2796
2797
2798
2799
2800
2801
2802
2803
2804
2805
 223 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

2806
2807
2808
2809
2810
2811
2812
2813
2814
2815
2816 TEMP001
2817 TEMP002
2818 TEMP003
2819 TEMP004
2820 TEMP005
2821 TEMP006
2822 TEMP007
2823 TEMP008
2824 TEMP009
2825 TEMP010
2826 TEMP011
2827 TEMP012
2828 TEMP013
2829 TEMP014
2830 TEMP015
2831 TEMP016
2832 TEMP017
2833 TEMP018
2834 TEMP019
2835 TEMP020
2836 TEMP021
2837 TEMP022
2838 TEMP023
2839 TEMP024
2840 TEMP025
2841 TEMP026
2842 TEMP027
2843 TEMP028
2844 TEMP029
2845 TEMP030
2846 TEMP031
2847 TEMP032
2848 TEMP033
2849 TEMP034
2850 TEMP035
2851 TEMP036
2852 TEMP037
2853 TEMP038
2854 TEMP039
2855 TEMP040
2856 TEMP041
2857 TEMP042
2858 TEMP043
2859 TEMP044
2860 TEMP045
2861 TEMP046
2862 TEMP047
2863 TEMP048
2864 TEMP049
2865 TEMP050
2866 TEMP051
2867 TEMP052
2868 TEMP053
2869 TEMP054
 224 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

2870 TEMP055
2871 TEMP056
2872 TEMP057
2873 TEMP058
2874 TEMP059
2875 TEMP060
2876 TEMP061
2877 TEMP062
2878 TEMP063
2879 TEMP064
2880 TEMP065
2881 TEMP066
2882 TEMP067
2883 TEMP068
2884 TEMP069
2885 TEMP070
2886 TEMP071
2887 TEMP072
2888 TEMP073
2889 TEMP074
2890 TEMP075
2891 TEMP076
2892 TEMP077
2893 TEMP078
2894 TEMP079
2895 TEMP080
2896 TEMP081
2897 TEMP082
2898 TEMP083
2899 TEMP084
2900 TEMP085
2901 TEMP086
2902 TEMP087
2903 TEMP088
2904 TEMP089
2905 TEMP090
2906 TEMP091
2907 TEMP092
2908 TEMP093
2909 TEMP094
2910 TEMP095
2911 TEMP096
2912 TEMP097
2913 TEMP098
2914 TEMP099
2915 TEMP100
2916 TEMP101
2917 TEMP102
2918 TEMP103
2919 TEMP104
2920 TEMP105
2921 TEMP106
2922 TEMP107
2923 TEMP108
2924 TEMP109
2925 TEMP110
2926 TEMP111
2927 TEMP112
2928 TEMP113
2929 TEMP114
2930 TEMP115
2931 TEMP116
2932 TEMP117
2933 TEMP118
 225 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

2934 TEMP119
2935 TEMP120
2936 TEMP121
2937 TEMP122
2938 TEMP123
2939 TEMP124
2940 TEMP125
2941 TEMP126
2942 TEMP127
2943 TEMP128
2944 TEMP129
2945 TEMP130
2946 TEMP131
2947 TEMP132
2948 TEMP133
2949 TEMP134
2950 TEMP135
2951 TEMP136
2952 TEMP137
2953 TEMP138
2954 TEMP139
2955 TEMP140
2956 TEMP141
2957 TEMP142
2958 TEMP143
2959 TEMP144
2960 TEMP145
2961 TEMP146
2962 TEMP147
2963 TEMP148
2964 TEMP149
2965 TEMP150
2966 TEMP151
2967 TEMP152
2968 TEMP153
2969 TEMP154
2970 TEMP155
2971 TEMP156
2972 TEMP157
2973 TEMP158
2974 TEMP159
2975 TEMP160
2976 TEMP161
2977 TEMP162
2978 TEMP163
2979 TEMP164
2980 TEMP165
2981 TEMP166
2982 TEMP167
2983 TEMP168
2984 TEMP169
2985 TEMP170
2986 TEMP171
2987 TEMP172
2988 TEMP173
2989 TEMP174
2990 TEMP175
2991 TEMP176
2992 TEMP177
2993 TEMP178
2994 TEMP179
2995 TEMP180
2996 TEMP181
2997 TEMP182
 226 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

2998 TEMP183
2999 TEMP184
3000 TEMP185
3001 TEMP186
3002 TEMP187
3003 TEMP188
3004 TEMP189
3005 TEMP190
3006 TEMP191
3007 TEMP192
3008 TEMP193
3009 TEMP194
3010 TEMP195
3011 TEMP196
3012 TEMP197
3013 TEMP198
3014 TEMP199
3015 TEMP200
3016 TEMP201
3017 TEMP202
3018 TEMP203
3019 TEMP204
3020 TEMP205
3021 TEMP206
3022 TEMP207
3023 TEMP208
3024 TEMP209
3025 TEMP210
3026 TEMP211
3027 TEMP212
3028 TEMP213
3029 TEMP214
3030 TEMP215
3031 TEMP216
3032 TEMP217
3033 TEMP218
3034 TEMP219
3035 TEMP220
3036 TEMP221
3037 TEMP222
3038 TEMP223
3039 TEMP224
3040 TEMP225
3041 TEMP226
3042 TEMP227
3043 TEMP228
3044 TEMP229
3045 TEMP230
3046 TEMP231
3047 TEMP232
3048 TEMP233
3049 TEMP234
3050 TEMP235
3051 TEMP236
3052 TEMP237
3053 TEMP238
3054 TEMP239
3055 TEMP240
3056 TEMP241
3057 TEMP242
3058 TEMP243
3059 TEMP244
3060 TEMP245
3061 TEMP246
 227 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

3062 TEMP247
3063 TEMP248
3064 TEMP249
3065 TEMP250
3066 TEMP251
3067 TEMP252
3068 TEMP253
3069 TEMP254
3070 TEMP255
3071 TEMP256
 228 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Appendix I
Commissioning Test Sheet (sample)
1. Relay identification
2. Preliminary check
3. Hardware test
3.1 User interface check
3.2 Binary input/Binary output circuit check
3.3 AC input circuit check
4. Function test
4.1 Percentage current differential element DIF test
4.2 2F-lock element check
4.4 High-set overcurrent element HOC test
4.5 Restricted earth fault element REF test
4.6 Overcurrent element test
4.7 Thermal overload element THR test
4.8 Frequency element FRQ test
4.9 Overexcitation element V/F test
5. Protection scheme test
6. Metering and recording check
7. Conjunctive test
 229 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
1. Relay identification
Type Serial number

Model System frequency
Station Date
Circuit Engineer
Protection scheme Witness
Active settings group number
2. Preliminary check
Ratings
CT shorting contacts
DC power supply
Power up
Wiring
Relay inoperative
alarm contact
Calendar and clock
3. Hardware check
3.1 User interface check
3.2 Binary input/Binary output circuit check
Binary input circuit

Binary output circuit
3.3 AC input circuit check
 230 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
4. Function test
4.1 Percentage current differential element DIF test
(1) Minimum operating value test
Tap setting Measured current
(2) Percentage restraining characteristic test
Tap setting I1 Measured current (I2)
 Ik
 Ik
(3) Operating time test
Tap setting Test current Measured time
4.4 High-set overcurrent element HOC test
(1) Minimum operating value test

Tap setting Measured current
Tap setting Test current Measured time
4.5 Restricted earth fault element REF test
Tap setting Ia Measured current (In)
 Ik
 Ik
 231 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
4.6 Overcurrent element test
(1) OC element
Element Tap setting Measured current
OC
(2) EF element
Element Tap setting Measured current

EF
(3) OCI element
Element Test current Measured operating time

OCI 2  Is
20  Is
Is: Setting value
(4) EFI element

EFI 2  Is
20  Is
4.7 Thermal overload element THR test

THR
4.8 Frequency element FRQ test
(1) Frequency
Element Setting Measured frequency

FRQ-L1
FRQ-L2
FRQ-H1
FRQ-H2
 232 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
(2) Undervoltage block
Setting Measured voltage
4.9 Overexcitation element V/F test
(1) Operating value test
Element Setting Measured voltage

V/F
Test voltage Measured operating time
5. Protection scheme test
Scheme Results
6. Metering and recording check
7. Conjunctive test
Scheme Results
On load
Tripping circuit
 233 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
 234 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Appendix J
Return Repair Form
 235 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
RETURN / REPAIR FORM

Please fill in this form and return it to Toshiba Corporation with the GRT100 to be repaired.
TOSHIBA CORPORATION Fuchu Complex

1, Toshiba-cho, Fuchu-shi, Tokyo, Japan
For: Power Systems Protection & Control Department
Quality Assurance Section
Type: GRT100 Model:

(Example: Type: GRT100 Model: 101C- 22-10)
Product No.:
Serial No. :
Date:
1. Why the relay is being returned ?

 mal-operation
 does not operate
 increased error
 investigation
 others
2. Fault records, event records or disturbance records stored in the relay and relay settings are
very helpful information to investigate the incident.
So please inform us the information concerned in the incident with Floppy Disk, or filling up
the Fault Record sheet and Relay Setting sheet attached.
 236 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Fault Record
Date/Month/Year Time / / / : : .
(Example: 04/ Nov./ 1997 15:09:58.442)
Faulty phase:
Prefault values (CT ratio: kA/: A, VT ratio: kV/: V)

Ia1: kA or A  Ia2: kA or A 
Ib1: kA or A  Ib2: kA or A 
Ic1: kA or A  Ic2: kA or A 
I11: kA or A  I12: kA or A 
I21: kA or A  I22: kA or A 
I01: kA or A  I02: kA or A 
In1: kA or A  In2: kA or A 
Ia3: kA or A 
Ib3: kA or A 
Ic3: kA or A 
I13: kA or A 
I23: kA or A 
I03: kA or A 
In3: kA or A 
V: kV or V 
Ida: kA or A Id01: kA or A
Idb: kA or A Id02: kA or A
Idc: kA or A Id03: kA or A
Fault values (CT ratio: kA/: A, VT ratio: kV/: V)

Ia1: kA or A  Ia2: kA or A 
Ib1: kA or A  Ib2: kA or A 
Ic1: kA or A  Ic2: kA or A 
I11: kA or A  I12: kA or A 
I21: kA or A  I22: kA or A 
I01: kA or A  I02: kA or A 
In1: kA or A  In2: kA or A 
Ia3: kA or A 
Ib3: kA or A 
Ic3: kA or A 
I13: kA or A 
I23: kA or A 
I03: kA or A 
In3: kA or A 
V: kV or V 
Ida: kA or A Id01: kA or A
Idb: kA or A Id02: kA or A
Idc: kA or A Id03: kA or A
 237 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
3. What was the message on the LCD display at the time of the incident.
4. Please write the detail of the incident.
5. Date of the incident occurred.

Day/ Month/ Year: / / /
(Example: 10/ July/ 1998)
6. Please write any comments on the GRT100, including the document.
 238 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Customer
Name:
Company Name:
Address:
Telephone No.:
Facsimile No.:
Signature:
 239 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
 240 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Appendix K
Technical Data
 241 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
TECHNICAL DATA
Ratings
AC current 1A or 5A
AC voltage 100V, 110V, 115V, 120V
Frequency 50Hz or 60Hz
DC power supply 110Vdc/125Vdc (Operative range: 88 to 150Vdc)
220Vdc/250Vdc (Operative range: 176 to 300Vdc)
48Vdc/54Vdc/60Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 to 72Vdc)
24Vdc/30Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 to 36Vdc)
maximum 12%
AC ripple on DC supply IEC 60255-11
DC supply interruption IEC 60255-11
Permissive duration of DC supply voltage
maximum 50ms at 110Vdc
interruption to maintain normal operation
less than 10s
Restart time
Overload rating
AC current input 4 times rated continuous
100 times rated for 1s
AC voltage input 2 times rated continuous
2.5 times rated for 1s
Burden
AC current circuit 0.3VA for phase input (at rated 5A)
0.4VA for neutral input (at rated 5A)
0.1VA for phase input (at rated 1A)
0.3VA for neutral input (at rated 1A)
AC voltage circuit 0.1VA (at rated voltage)
DC power supply less than 15W (quiescent)
less than 25W(operation)
Binary input circuit 0.5W/input at 110Vdc
Current differential protection
Minimum operate current (ik) 0.10 to 1.00pu in 0.01pu steps
Slope 1 (p1) 10 to 100% in 1% steps
kp 1.00 to 20.00pu in 0.01pu steps
Vector group compensation (Winding 1 to 3) (d1 – d3) 0 to 11 (0 to 330deg in 30deg steps)
CT ratio correction (Winding 1 to 3) (kct1 – kct3) 0.05 to 50.00 in 0.01 steps
Inrush setting (2nd harmonic ratio) (k2f) 10 to 50% in 1% steps
Overexcitation setting (5th harmonic ratio) (k5f) 10 to 100% in 1% steps
Operating time typical 35ms
High-set differential overcurrent protection
Overcurrent (kh) 2.00 to 20.00pu in 0.01pu steps
Restricted earth fault element
Minimum operating current 0.05 to 0.50pu in 0.01pu steps
Slope 1 (p1) 10 %
kp 0.50 to 2.00pu in 0.01pu steps
CT ratio correction (kct) 1.00 to 50.00 in 0.01 steps
 242 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Time-overcurrent protection
High-set overcurrent element
Pick up level (OC, EF) 0.10 to 20.00pu in 0.10pu steps
Delay time (TOC, TEF) 0.00 to 10.00s in 0.01s steps
Operating time typical 30ms (without delay time)
Inverse time overcurrent element
Pick up level (OCI, EFI) 0.10 to 5.00pu in 0.01pu steps
Time multiplier (TOCI, TEFI) 0.05 to 1.00 in 0.01 steps
Characteristic Three IEC standard 60255-3 (Standard inverse, Very inverse,
Extremely inverse), or a Long-time inverse
*Refer to Appendix P.
Thermal overload protection
Thermal time constant (τ) 0.5 to 500.0min in 0.1min steps
Constant (k) 0.10 to 4.00 in 0.01 steps
Basic current (IB) 0.50 t0 2.50pu in 0.01pu steps
Special load current before overload (Ip) 0.00 to 1.00pu in 0.01 steps
Time for alarming (TA) 0 to 10min in 1min steps
Frequency protection
Overfrequency 50.00 to 55.00Hz in 0.01Hz steps (50Hz relay)
60.00 to 66.00Hz in 0.01Hz steps (60Hz relay)
Underfrequency 45.00 to 50.00Hz in 0.01Hz steps (50Hz relay)
54.00 to 60.00Hz in 0.01Hz steps (60Hz relay)
Delay time 0.00 to 60.00s in 0.01s steps
Start time less than 100ms
Undervoltage blocking 40 to 100V in 1V steps
Overexitation protection
Pickup voltage 100.0 to 120.0V in 0.1V steps
Alarm level (A) 1.03 to 1.30pu in 0.01pu steps
High level (H) 1.10 to 1.40pu in 0.01pu steps
Low level (L) 1.05 to 1.30pu in 0.01pu steps
LT (Definite time) 1 to 600s in 1s steps
HT (Definite time) 1 to 600s in 1s steps
TVFH (Definite time) 1 to 600s in 1s steps
TVFA (Definite time) 1 to 600s in 1s steps
Start time less than 130ms
RT (Definite time) 60 to 3600s in 1s steps
Accuracy
Current differential element: pick-up 5%
reset 5%
Time-overcurrent protection: pick-up 5%
Inverse time overcurrent characteristics:
Standard inverse, Very and long-time inverse IEC60255-3 class 5
Extremely inverse IEC60255-3 class 7.5
Thermal overload protection: pick-up 10%
Frequency protection: pick-up 0.03Hz
Overexitation protection 2% of pick-up voltage (frequency range 2%)
 243 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Disturbance record initiation

Overcurrent element 0.10 to 20.00pu in 0.01pu steps
Earth fault 0.05 to 20.00pu in 0.01pu steps
Pre-fault time 0.3s (fixed)
Post-fault time 0.1 to 3.0s in 0.1s steps
Communication port
Front communication port (local PC)
Connection Point to point
Cable type Multi-core (straight)
Cable length 15m (max.)
Connector RS232C 9-pin D-subminiature connector female
Rear communication port (remote PC)
RS485 I/F:
Transmission data rate for RSM system 64kbps
Connection Multidrop mode (max. 32 relays)
Connector Screw terminals
Cable and length Twisted pair cable with shield, max. 1200m
Isolation 2kVac for 1min.
Fibre optic I/F: ST connector, graded-index multi-mode 62.5/125m type
optical fibres
IRIG-B port
IRIG Time Code IRIG-B122
Input impedance 4k-ohm
Input voltage range 4Vp-p to 10Vp-p
Connector type BNC connector
Cable type 50 ohm coaxial cable
Binary inputs
Operating voltage Typical 74Vdc(min. 70Vdc) for 110V/125Vdc rating
Typical 138Vdc(min. 125Vdc) for 220V/250Vdc rating
Typical 32Vdc(min. 30Vdc) for 48V/54V/60Vdc rating
Typical 16Vdc(min.15Vdc) for 24V/30Vdc rating
Contact ratings
Trip contacts
Make and carry 5A continuously,
30A, 290Vdc for 0.5s (L/R=10ms)
Break 0.15A, 290Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Auxiliary contacts
Make and carry 4A continuously,
10A, 220Vdc for 0.5s (L/R≧5ms)
Break 0.1A, 220Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Durability
Make and carry 10,000 operations minimum
Break 100,000 operations minimum
Mechanical design
Weight 12kg
Case color 2.5Y7.5/1(approximation to Munsell value)
Installation Flush mounting or rack mounting
 244 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
CT requirement
The GRT100 does not require the use of dedicated CTs nor the use of CTs with an identical ratio.
The GRT100 can share the CTs with other protections and the different ratios are adjusted by
setting.
The general CT requirements are set for the through-fault stability which comes up when any CTs
saturate under very large through-fault currents. To ensure correct operation of the GRT100 for
such through-fault currents, the factor Ks of each CT is required to satisfy the following
conditions:
Ks ≧ 1 when Tc ≦ 150ms
or
Ks ≧ 5 when Tc ≦ 200ms
where,
Ks = ratio of CT knee point voltage to CT secondary probable voltage under the maximum
through-fault current
= Vk / {(RCT + RL + RB + RO )(IFmax / CT ratio)}
Tc = d.c. time constant of primary circuit
Vk = knee point voltage of CT
RCT = resistance of CT secondary winding
RL = loop resistance of cable between CT and relay
RB = ohmic load of GRT100 (i.e. 0.1 ohm for 1A rating and 0.012 ohm for 5A rating)
RO = ohmic load of other series-connected relays (if any)
IFmax = maximum through-fault current
For example, if the following parameters are given:
Vk = 800 V, CT ratio = 1,200/1, RCT = 5.0 ohm, RL = 3.0 ohm, RB = 0.1 ohm,
RO = 0 ohm (i.e. no series-connected relays) and IFmax = 40kA
then the factor Ks is calculated as:
Ks = 800/{(5.0 + 3.0 + 0.1)×(40,000/1,200) }
= 800/270
= 3.0
This shows that the GRT100 operates correctly for all the faults under the condition that the d.c.
time constant of the primary circuit is less than 200ms.
 245 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE CLAIMS
Test Standards Details

Atmospheric Environment
Temperature IEC60068-2-1/2 Operating range: -10C to +55C.
Storage / Transit: -25C to +70C.
Humidity IEC60068-2-78 56 days at 40C and 93% relative humidity.
Enclosure Protection IEC60529 IP51 (Rear: IP20)
Mechanical Environment
Vibration IEC60255-21-1 Response - Class 1
Endurance - Class 1
Shock and Bump IEC60255-21-2 Shock Response Class 1
Shock Withstand Class 1
Bump Class 1
Seismic IEC60255-21-3 Class 1
Electrical Environment
Dielectric Withstand IEC60255-5 2kVrms for 1 minute between all terminals and earth.
2kVrms for 1 minute between independent circuits.
1kVrms for 1 minute across normally open contacts.
High Voltage Impulse IEC60255-5 Three positive and three negative impulses of 5kV(peak), 1.2/50s,
0.5J between all terminals and between all terminals and earth.
Electromagnetic Environment
High Frequency IEC60255-22-1 Class 3, 1MHz 2.5kV applied to all ports in common mode.
Disturbance / Damped IEC61000-4-12 / 1MHz 1.0kV applied to all ports in differential mode.
Oscillatory Wave EN61000-4-12
Electrostatic Discharge IEC60255-22-2 Class 3, 6kV contact discharge, 8kV air discharge.
IEC61000-4-2 / EN61000-4-2
Radiated RF IEC60255-22-3, Field strength 10V/m for frequency sweeps of 80MHz to 1GHz and
Electromagnetic IEC61000-4-3 / EN61000-4-3 1.4GHz to 2.7GHz. Additional spot tests at 80, 160, 450, 900, 1850
Disturbance and 2150MHz.
Fast Transient IEC60255-22-4 Class A, 4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns applied to all inputs.
Disturbance IEC61000-4-4 / EN61000-4-4
Surge Immunity IEC60255-22-5, 1.2/50s surge in common/differential modes:
IEC61000-4-5 / EN61000-4-5 HV ports: 2kV/1kV (peak)
PSU and I/O ports: 2kV/1kV (peak)
RS485 port: 1kV (peak)
Conducted RF IEC60255-22-6, 10Vrms applied over frequency range 150kHz to 100MHz.
Electromagnetic IEC61000-4-6 / EN61000-4-6 Additional spot tests at 27 and 68MHz.
Disturbance
Power Frequency IEC60255-22-7 Class A, 300V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in common mode.
Disturbance IEC61000-4-16 / 150V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in differential mode.
EN61000-4-16 Not applicable to AC inputs.
Conducted and IEC60255-25, Conducted emissions:
Radiated Emissions IEC61000-6-4 / 0.15 to 0.50MHz: <79 (peak) or <66 (mean) dB(V)
EN61000-6-4 0.50 to 30MHz: <73 (peak) or <60 (mean) dB(V)
CISPR22 Class A Radiated emissions (at 10m):
30 to 230MHz: <40dB(V/m)
230 to 1000MHz: <47dB(V/m)
 246 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Test Standards Details

European Commission Directives
89/336/EEC Compliance with the European Commission Electromagnetic
Compatibility Directive is demonstrated according to EN 61000-6-2
and EN 61000-6-4.
73/23/EEC Compliance with the European Commission Low Voltage Directive
is demonstrated according to EN 50178 and EN 60255-5.
 247 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
 248 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Appendix L
Setting of REF Element
 249 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Type of transformer Scheme switch setting

[1REF] = 1I0
1ct-1 HV LV 2ct-1
[2REF] = 1I0
1nCT 2nCT
1REF 2REF
In1 In2
[1REF] = 2I0
1ct-1
HV 2REF1 = OFF
2REF2 = OFF
2REF3 = OFF
2REF4 = OFF
1nCT 1REF 2REF5 = OFF
LV In1 3REF1 = OFF

3REF2 = OFF
3REF3 = OFF
1ct-2 3REF4 = OFF
3REF5 = OFF
1ct-1 HV LV 1REF = 1I0
1nCT
In1
1REF
 250 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
HV LV I02 2REF = 1I0
2ct-1
I2a 1REF1 to 5 = OFF

I2b
2nCT I2c 3REF1 to 5 = OFF
I2N
2REF
1ct-1 HV MV 2ct-1 1REF = 1I0

2REF = 1I0
3REF = 1I0
I1a I2a
I1b I2b
I1c 1nCT 2nCT I2c
1REF LV 2REF
I1N I2N
I3a, I3b, I3c

3nCT
3ct-1 3REF
I3N
1REF = 1I0
1ct-1 HV MV 2ct-1
2REF = 1I0
3REF1 to 5 = OFF
I1a I2a
I1b I2b
I1c I2c
1nCT LV 2nCT
1REF 2REF
I1N I2N
 251 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
1ct-1 HV MV 1REF = 1I0

3REF = 1I0
I1a
I1b
I1c 1nCT 2REF1 to 5 = OFF
1REF LV
I1N
3nCT
I3N
3ct-1 3REF
I3a, I3b, I3c
HV MV 2ct-1 2REF = 1I0

3REF = 1I0
I2a
I2b
I2c
2nCT 1REF1 to 5 = OFF
LV I2N
2REF
3nCT I3N
3ct-1 3REF
I3a, I3b, I3c
1ct-1 HV MV 1REF = 1I0
I1a 2REF1 to 5 = OFF

I1b
I1c 3REF1 to 5 = OFF
1nCT
1REF LV
I1N
HV MV 2ct-1 2REF = 1I0
1REF1 to 5 = OFF
I2a
I2b
I2c 3REF1 to 5 = OFF
2nCT
LV 2REF
I2N
 252 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
HV MV 3REF = 1I0
1REF1 to 5 = OFF
3REF1 to 5 = OFF
LV 3nCT
I3N
3ct-1 3REF
I3a, I3b, I3c
1REF = 2I0
HV LV I3a, I3b, I3c 3REF = 1I0
2REF1 to 5 = OFF
I3N I1a
LV 3REF I1b
I1c
I1N
1REF
I2a, I2b, I2c
1REF = 2I0
1ct-1
LV
HV
2REF1 to 5 = OFF
I1a
MV I1b 3REF1 to 5 = OFF
1nCT I1c
I1N
1ct-2 1REF
I2a, I2b, I2c
1REF = 1I0
2ct-1 2REF = 2I0
MV HV I1a, I1b, I1c
1ct-1
3REF1 to 5 = OFF
1nCT I2a
LV I1N
1REF I2b
2nCT I2c
I2N
2ct-2 2REF
I3a, I3b, I3c
 253 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
2REF = 2I0
2ct-1
MV HV
1REF1 to 5 = OFF
I2a
LV I2b 3REF1 to 5 = OFF
2nCT I2c
I2N
2ct-2 2REF
I3a, I3b, I3c
I1a, I1b, I1c I2a, I2b, I2c 1REF = 3I0
1ct-1 1ct-2
HV
2REF1 to 5 = OFF
3REF1 to 5 = OFF
MV
1nCT
I1N
1ct-3 1REF
I3a, I3b, I3c
1REF = 3I0
1ct-1
HV
2REF1 to 5 = OFF
3REF1 to 5 = OFF
I1a
MV I1b
1nCT I1c
I1N
1REF
I3a I2a
I3b I2b
1ct-2 1ct-3 I3c I2c
 254 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Appendix M
Symbols Used in Scheme Logic
 255 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Symbols used in the scheme logic and their meanings are as follows:
Signal names
Marked with : Measuring element output signal
Marked with : Binary signal input from or output to the external equipment
Marked with [ ] : Scheme switch
Marked with " " : Scheme switch position
Unmarked : Internal scheme logic signal
AND gates
A A B C Output
B & Output 1 1 1 1
Other cases 0
C
A
A B C Output
B & Output 1 1 0 1
C Other cases 0
A
B & A B C Output
Output
1 0 0 1
C Other cases 0
OR gates
A A B C Output
B 1 Output 0 0 0 0
C Other cases 1
A
A B C Output
B 1 Output 0 0 1 0
C Other cases 1
A
A B C Output
B 1 Output 0 1 1 0
C Other cases 1
 256 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Signal inversion
A Output
A 1 Output 0 1
1 0
Timer
t 0 Delaye pick-up timer with fixed setting
XXX: Set time
XXX
0 t
Delayed drop-off timer with fixed setting
XXX: Set time
XXX
t 0 Delaye pick-up timer with variable setting

XXX - YYY: Setting range
XXX - YYY
0 t Delayed drop-off timer with variable setting

XXX - YYY
One-shot timer
A
A Output
Output
XXX - YYY
Flip-flop
S R Output
S 0 0 No change
F/F Output 1 0 1
R 0 1 0
1 1 0
Scheme switch
A Switch Output
A Output
1 ON 1
ON
Other cases 0
Switch Output
 Output
ON 1
ON OFF 0
 257 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
 258 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Appendix N
Implementation of Thermal Model to
IEC60255-8
 259 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Implementation of Thermal Model to IEC60255-8

Heating by overload current and cooling by dissipation of an electrical system follow exponential time
constants. The thermal characteristics of the electrical system can be shown by equation (1).
I2  t 
 = 1  e    100% (1)
I AOL 
2 
where:
 = thermal state of the system as a percentage of allowable thermal capacity,
I = applied load current,
IAOL = kIB = allowable overload current of the system,
 = thermal time constant of the system.
The thermal stateθis expressed as a percentage of the thermal capacity of the protected system, where
0% represents the cold state and 100% represents the thermal limit, that is the point at which no further
temperature rise can be safely tolerated and the system should be disconnected. The thermal limit for any
given electrical plant is fixed by the thermal setting IAOL. The relay gives a trip output when θ = 100%.
If current I is applied to a cold system, then  will rise exponentially from 0% to (I2/IAOL2 × 100%), with time
constant , as in Figure N-1. If  = 100%, then the allowable thermal capacity of the system has been reached.
 (%)
100%
I2 2 100%
I AOL
2  t 
  I I 2 1  e 

 100%
AOL
t (s)
Figure N-1
A thermal overload protection relay can be designed to model this function, giving tripping times
according to the IEC60255-8 ‘Hot’ and ‘Cold’ curves.
 I2 
t =τ·Ln  2 2  (1) ∙∙∙∙∙ Cold curve
 I  I AOL 
 I2  I 2 
t =τ·Ln  2 2P  (2) ∙∙∙∙∙ Hot curve
 I  I AOL 
 260 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
where:
IP = prior load current.
In fact, the cold curve is simply a special case of the hot curve where prior load current IP = 0, catering for
the situation where a cold system is switched on to an immediate overload.
Figure N-2 shows a typical thermal profile for a system which initially carries normal load current, and is
then subjected to an overload condition until a trip results, before finally cooling to ambient temperature.
() Overload Current

Condition Trip at 100%
100%
Normal Load
Current Condition Cooling Curve
t (s)
Figure N-2 (1) Thermal Curve without Prior Load Current
() Overload Current

Condition Trip at 100%
100%
Cooling Curve
80%
Normal Load
Current Condition
t (s)
Figure N-2 (2) Thermal curve with Prior Load Current (=80%)
 261 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
 262 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Appendix O
IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability and
Troubleshooting
 263 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
IEC60870-5-103 Configurator
IEC103 configurator software is included in a same CD as RSM100, and can be installed easily as
follows:
Installation of IEC103 Configurator
Insert the CD-ROM (RSM100) into a CDROM drive to install this software on a PC.
Double click the “Setup.exe” of the folder “\IEC103Conf” under the root directory, and operate it
according to the message.
When installation has been completed, the IEC103 Configurator will be registered in the start
menu.
Starting IEC103 Configurator
Click [Start][Programs][IEC103 Configurator][IECConf] to the IEC103 Configurator
software.
Note: The instruction manual of IEC103 Configurator can be viewed by clicking
[Help][Manual] on IEC103 Configurator.
IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability
1. Physical Layer
1.1 Electrical interface: EIA RS-485
Number of loads, 32 for one protection equipment
1.2 Optical interface
Glass fibre (option)
ST type connector (option)
1.3 Transmission speed
User setting: 9600 or 19200 bit/s
2. Application Layer
COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU
One COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU (identical with station address)
3. List of Information
The following items can be customized with the original software tool “IEC103 configurator”.
(For details, refer to “IEC103 configurator” manual No.6F2S0812.)
- Items for “Time-tagged message”: Type ID(1/2), INF, FUN, Transmission condition(Signal
number), COT
- Items for “Time-tagged measurands”: INF, FUN, Transmission condition(Signal number),
COT, Type of measurand quantities
- Items for “General command”: INF, FUN, Control condition(Signal number)
- Items for “Measurands”: Type ID(3/9), INF, FUN, Number of measurand, Type of
measurand quantities
- Common setting
 264 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
 Transmission cycle of Measurand frame

 FUN of System function
 Test mode, etc.
CAUTION: To be effective the setting data written via the RS232C, turn off the DC supply of
the relay and turn on again.
3. 1 IEC60870-5-103 Interface
3.1.1 Spontaneous events
The events created by the relay will be sent using Function type (FUN) / Information numbers
(INF) to the IEC60870-5-103 master station.
3.1.2 General interrogation
The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the Function types and Information
numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle are shown in the table below.
For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.3.
3.1.3 Cyclic measurements
The relay will produce measured values using Type ID=3 or 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be read
from the relay using a Class 2 poll. The rate at which the relay produces new measured values can
be customized.
3.1.4 Commands
The supported commands can be customized. The relay will respond to non-supported commands
with a cause of transmission (COT) of negative acknowledgement of a command.
3.1.5 Test mode
In test mode, both spontaneous messages and polled measured values, intended for processing in
the control system, are designated by means of the CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION ‘test mode’.
This means that CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION = 7 ‘test mode’ is used for messages normally
transmitted with COT=1 (spontaneous) or COT=2 (cyclic).
3.1.6 Blocking of monitor direction
If the blocking of the monitor direction is activated in the protection equipment, all indications
and measurands are no longer transmitted.
3.2 List of Information

The followings are the default settings.
 265 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
List of Information
IEC103 Configurator Default setting
INF Description Contents GI Type COT FUN DPI
ID Signal No. OFF ON
Standard Information numbers in monitor direction
System Function
0 End of General Interrogation Transmission completion of GI items. -- 8 10 255 -- -- --
0 Time Synchronization Time Synchronization ACK. -- 6 8 255 -- -- --
2 Reset FCB Reset FCB(toggle bit) ACK -- 5 3 176 -- -- --
3 Reset CU Reset CU ACK -- 5 4 176 -- -- --
4 Start/Restart Relay start/restart -- 5 5 176 -- -- --
5 Pow er On Relay pow er on. Not supported -- -- --
Status Indications
If it is possible to use auto-recloser, this item is set
16 Auto-recloser active Not supported
active, if impossible, inactive.
If protection using telecommunication is available, this
17 Teleprotection active Not supported
item is set to active. If not, set to inactive.
If the protection is available, this item is set to active. If 1, 7, 9, 12,
18 Protection active GI 1 176 1413 1 2
not, set to inactive. 20, 21
1, 7, 11, 12,
19 LED reset Reset of latched LEDs -- 1 176 1409 -- 2
20, 21
Block the 103 transmission from a relay to control
20 Monitor direction blocked GI 1 9, 11 176 1241 1 2
system. IECBLK: "Blocked" settimg.
Transmission of testmode situation from a relay to
21 Test mode GI 1 9, 11 176 1242 1 2
control system. IECTST "ON" setting.
When a setting change has done at the local, the
22 Local parameter Setting Not supported
event is sent to control system.
1, 7, 9, 11,
23 Characteristic1 Setting group 1 active GI 1 176 1243 1 2
12, 20, 21
1, 7, 9, 11,
12, 20, 21
1, 7, 9, 11,
12, 20, 21
1, 7, 9, 11,
12, 20, 21
27 Auxiliary input1 No
Supervision Indications
32 Measurand supervision I Zero sequence current supervision GI 1 1, 7, 9 176 1271 1 2
33 Measurand supervision V Zero sequence voltage supervision Not supported
35 Phase sequence supervision Negative sequence voltage supevision Not supported
36 Trip circuit supervision Output circuit supervision Not supported
37 I>>backup operation Not supported
38 VT fuse failure VT failure Not supported
39 Teleprotection disturbed CF(Communication system Fail) supervision Not supported
46 Group w arning Only alarming GI 1 1, 7, 9 176 1258 1 2
47 Group alarm Trip blocking and alarming GI 1 1, 7, 9 176 1252 1 2
Earth Fault Indications

48 Earth Fault L1 A phase earth fault No
49 Earth Fault L2 B phase earth fault No
50 Earth Fault L3 C phase earth fault No
51 Earth Fault Fw d Earth fault forw ard Not supported
52 Earth Fault Rev Earth fault reverse Not supported
 266 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

INF Description Contents GI Type COT FUN DPI
ID Signal NO. OFF ON
Fault Indications
64 Start/pick-up L1 A phase, A-B phase or C-A phase element pick-up No
65 Start/pick-up L2 B phase, A-B phase or B-C phase element pick-up No
66 Start/pick-up L3 C phase, B-C phase or C-A phase element pick-up No
67 Start/pick-up N Earth fault element pick-up No
68 General trip Any trip -- 2 1, 7 176 1280 -- 2
69 Trip L1 A phase, A-B phase or C-A phase trip No
70 Trip L2 B phase, A-B phase or B-C phase trip No
71 Trip L3 C phase, B-C phase or C-A phase trip No
72 Trip I>>(back-up) Back up trip Not supported
Fault location (prim. [ohm] / second. [ohm] / km
73 Fault location X In ohms Not supported
selectable by IECFL)
74 Fault forward/line Forward fault Not supported
75 Fault reverse/Busbar Reverse fault Not supported
Teleprotection Signal
76 Carrier signal sending Not supported
transmitted
77 Teleprotection Signal received Carrier signal receiving Not supported
78 Zone1 Zone 1 trip Not supported

84 General Start/Pick-up Any elements pick-up No
85 Breaker Failure CBF trip or CBF retrip Not supported
86 Trip measuring system L1 No
89 Trip measuring system E No
90 Trip I> Inverse time OC trip No
91 Trip I>> Definite time OC trip No
92 Trip IN> Inverse time earth fault OC trip No
93 Trip IN>> Definite time earth fault OC trip No
Autoreclose indications
128 CB 'ON' by Autoreclose CB close command output Not supported
CB 'ON' by long-time
129 Not supported
Autoreclose
130 Autoreclose Blocked Autoreclose block Not supported
 267 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
IEC103 configurator Default setting

INF Description Contents Type
GI COT FUN Max. No.
ID
Measurands
144 Measurand I <meaurand I> No 0
145 Measurand I,V Ib1, Vab measurand <meaurand I> -- 3.2 2, 7 176 2
146 Measurand I,V,P,Q <meaurand I> No 0
147 Measurand IN,VEN <meaurand I> No 0
Measurand IL1,2,3, VL1,2,3,
148 Ia1, Ib1, Ic1, f measurand <meaurand II> -- 9 2, 7 176 9
P,Q,f
Generic Function
240 Read Headings Not supported
Read attributes of all entries
241 Not supported
of a group
243 Read directory of entry Not supported
244 Real attribute of entry Not supported
245 End of GGI Not supported
249 Write entry with confirm Not supported
250 Write entry with execute Not supported
251 Write entry aborted Not supported
Details of MEA settings in IEC103 configurator

INF MEA Tb1 Offset Data type Limit Co eff
Lower Upper
145 Ib1 1 28 short 0 4096 1.706666
Vab 1 12 short 0 4096 3.413333
148 Ia1 1 24 short 0 4096 1.706666
Ia2 1 28 short 0 4096 1.706666
Ia3 1 32 short 0 4096 1.706666
f 2 28 short 0 4096 0.0000833
 268 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

INF Description Contents
Type
COM COT FUN
ID
Selection of standard information numbers in control direction
System functions
Initiation of general
0 -- 7 9 255
interrogation
0 Time synchronization -- 6 8 255
General commands
16 Auto-recloser on/off Not supported
17 Teleprotection on/off Not supported
18 Protection on/off (*1) ON/OFF 20 20 176
19 LED reset Reset indication of latched LEDs. ON 20 20 176
23 Activate characteristic 1 Setting Group 1 ON 20 20 176
Generic functions
Read headings of all defined
240 Not supported
groups
Read values or attributes of all
241 Not supported
entries of one group
Read directory of a single
243 Not supported
entry
Read values or attributes of a
244 Not supported
single entry
General Interrogation of
245 Not supported
generic data
248 Write entry Not supported
249 Write entry with confirmation Not supported
250 Write entry with execution Not supported
(1) Note: While the relay receives the "Protection off" command, " IN SERVICE LED" is off.
Details of Command settings in IEC103 configurator

INF DCO
Sig off Sig on Rev Valid time
18 2686 2686 ✓ 0
19 0 2688 200
23 0 2640 1000
24 0 2641 1000
25 0 2642 1000
26 0 2643 1000
✓: signal reverse
 269 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
GRT100
Description Contents Comment
supported
Basic application functions
Test mode Yes
Blocking of monitor direction Yes
Disturbance data No
Generic services No
Private data Yes
Miscellaneous
Max. MVAL = rated
Measurand
value times
Current L1 Ia Configurable
Current L2 Ib Configurable
Current L3 Ic Configurable
Voltage L1-E Va No
Voltage L2-E Vb No
Voltage L3-E Vc No
Active power P P No
Reactive power Q Q No
Frequency f f Configurable
Voltage L1 - L2 Vab Configurable
Details of Common settings in IEC103 configurator

- Setting file’s remark: GRT100_1.00
- Remote operation valid time [ms]: 4000
- Local operation valid time [ms]: 4000
- Measurand period [s]: 2
- Function type of System functions: 176
- Signal No. of Test mode: 1242
- Signal No. for Real time and Fault number: 1279
 270 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
[Legend]
GI: General Interrogation (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.3)
Type ID: Type Identification (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.1)
1 : time-tagged message
2 : time-tagged message with relative time
3 : measurands I
4 : time-tagged measurands with relative time
5 : identification
6 : time synchronization
8 : general interrogation termination
9 : measurands II
10: generic data
11: generic identification
20: general command
23: list of recorded disturbances
26: ready for transmission for disturbance data
27: ready for transmission of a channel
28: ready for transmission of tags
29: transmission of tags
30: transmission of disturbance values
31: end of transmission
COT: Cause of Transmission (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.3)
1: spontaneous
2: cyclic
3: reset frame count bit (FCB)
4: reset communication unit (CU)
5: start / restart
6: power on
7: test mode
8: time synchronization
9: general interrogation
10: termination of general interrogation
11: local operation
12: remote operation
20: positive acknowledgement of command
21: negative acknowledgement of command
31: transmission of disturbance data
40: positive acknowledgement of generic write command
41: negative acknowledgement of generic write command
42: valid data response to generic read command
43: invalid data response to generic read command
44: generic write confirmation
FUN: Function type (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.5.1)
DPI: Double-point Information (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.6.5)
DCO: Double Command (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.6.4)
 271 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
IEC103 setting data is recommended to be saved as follows:
(1) Naming for IEC103setting data
The file extension of IEC103 setting data is “.csv”. The version name is recommended to be
provided with a revision number in order to be changed in future as follows:
First draft: _01.csv
Second draft: _02.csv
Third draft: _03.csv
Revision number
The name “” is recommended to be able to discriminate the relay type such as GRZ100 or
GRL100, etc. The setting files remark field of IEC103 is able to enter up to 12 one-byte
characters. It is utilized for control of IEC103 setting data.
(2) Saving theIEC103 setting data
The IEC103 setting data is recommended to be saved in external media such as FD (floppy disk)
or CD-R, not to remain in the folder.
 272 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Troubleshooting
No. Phenomena Supposed causes Check / Confirmation

Object Procedure
1 Communication Address setting is incorrect. BCU Match address setting between BCU and relay.
trouble (IEC103
RY Avoid duplication of address with other relay.
communication is
not available.) Transmission baud rate setting is BCU Match transmission baud rate setting between
incorrect. BCU and relay.
RY
Start bit, stop bit and parity settings of BCU Go over the following settings by BCU. Relay
data that BCU transmits to relay is setting is fixed as following settings.
incorrect. - Start bit: 1bit
- Stop bit: 1bit
- Parity setting: even
The PRTCL1 setting is incorrect. (The RY Change the PRTCL1 setting. Relation between
model with PRTCL1 setting.) PRTCL1 setting and available transmission
protocol is referred to the following table.
RS485 port at the PRTCL1 PRTCL1

back of the relay =HDLC =IEC
COM1 (CH1) HDLC IEC
COM2 (CH2) IEC ―
RS485 or optical cable interconnection Cable - Check the connection port.(CH1/CH2)

is incorrect. - Check the interconnection of RS485 A/B/COM
- Check the send and received interconnection of
optical cable.
The setting of converter is incorrect. Converter In the event of using G1IF2, change the DIPSW
(RS485/optic conversion is executed setting in reference to INSTRUCTION MANUAL
with the transmission channel, etc.) (6F2S0794).
The relationship between logical “0/1” of BCU Check the following;
the signal and Sig.on/off is incorrect. (In Logical0 : Sig.on
the event of using optical cable)
Logical1:Sig.off
Terminal resistor is not offered. cable Impose terminal resistor (150[ohms]) to both ends
(Especially when RS485 cable is long.) of RS 485 cable.
Relay cannot receive the requirement BCU Check to secure the margin more than 15ms
frame from BCU. between receiving the reply frame from the relay
and transmitting the next requirement frame on
(The timing coordination of sending and
BCU.
receiving switch control is irregular in
half-duplex communication.)
The requirement frame from BCU and BCU Check to set the time-out of reply frame from the
the reply frame from relay contend. relay.
(The sending and receiving timing Time-out setting: more than 100ms (acceptable
coordination is irregular in half-duplex value of response time 50ms plus
communication.) margin)
 273 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
No. Phenomena Supposed causes Check / Confirmation

Object Procedure
2 HMI does not The relevant event sending condition is RY Change the event sending condition (signal
display IEC103 not valid. number) of IEC103 configurator if there is a setting
event on the SAS error. When the setting is correct, check the signal
side. condition by programmable LED, etc.
The relevant event Information Number RY Match the relevant event Information Number
(INF) and/or Function Type (FUN) may (INF) or Function Type (FUN) between the relay
SAS
be different between the relay and SAS. and SAS.
The relay is not initialised after writing RY Check the sum value of IEC103 setting data from
IEC103 configurator setting. the LCD screen. When differing from the sum
value on IEC103 configurator, initialise the relay.
It changes to the block mode. RY Change the IECBR settling to Normal.
3 Time can be BCU does not transmit the frame of time BCU Transmit the frame of time synchronisation.
synchronised with synchronisation.
IEC103
The settling of time synchronisation RY Change the settling of time synchronisation source
communication.
source is set to other than IEC. to IEC.
(Note) BCU: Bay control unit, RY: Relay
 274 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Appendix P
Inverse Time Characteristics
 275 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
IEC/UK Inverse Curves (NI) IEC/UK Inverse Curves (VI)

(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5) (Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)
100 100
10
10
Operating Time (s)

Operating Time (s)
TMS TMS
1.5 1 1.5
1.0
1.
0.5
0.5
1
0.2
0.1
0.2 0.1
0.1
0.1 0.01
1 10 100 1 10 100
Current (Multiple of Setting) Current (Multiple of Setting)
Normal Inverse Very Inverse
 276 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
IEC/UK Inverse Curves (EI)

(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)
1000
100
UK Inverse Curves (LTI)

(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)
1000
10
Operating Time (s)
100
Operating Time (s)
1
TMS
TMS
10 1.5
1.5 1.0
1.0
0.5
0.1 0.5
0.2
1
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.01 0.1
1 10 100 1 10 100
Current (Multiple of Setting) Current (Multiple of Setting)
Extremely Inverse Long Time Inverse
 277 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
 278 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Appendix Q
Failed Module Tracing and Replacement
 279 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
1. Failed module tracing and its replacement

If the “ALARM” LED is ON, the following procedure is recommended. If not repaired, contact
the vendor.
Procedure Countermeasure
No
“ALARM” LED ON? No failure
Not displayed
No
Any LCD messages? Press [VIEW] key Contact the vendor.
Yes
Yes
Not displayed
Press [VIEW] key Contact the vendor.
Locate the failed module. Locate the failed module referring to Table 1.
Caution: Check that the replacement module has an
identical module name (VCT, SPM, IO1,
IO2, etc.) and hardware type-form as the
failed module. Furthermore, the SPM
module must have the same software
name and version. Refer to Section
DC supply “OFF” 4.2.5.1.
Module replacement
As shown in the table, some of the messages cannot

identify the fault location definitely but suggest plural
possible failure locations. In these cases, the failure
location is identified by replacing the suggested failed
DC supply “ON” modules with spare modules one by one until the
No
“ALARM” LED OFF?
If both “IN SERVICE” LED and “ALARM” LED are
OFF, check the followings.
Check: Is DC supply voltage available with the correct
polarity and of adequate magnitude, and
End
connected to the correct terminals?
 280 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Table 1 LCD Message and Failure Location
Message Failure location

VCT SPM IO1 IO2 IO3 HMI AC cable
Checksum err 
ROM-RAM err 
SRAM err 
BU-RAM err 
DPRAM err 
EEPROM err 
A/D err 
CT1 err  (2)  (1)  (2)
CT2 err  (2)  (1)  (2)
CT3 err  (2)  (1)  (2)
Sampling err 
DIO err  (2)  (1)  (1)  (1)
RSM err  (2)  (1)
No-working of LCD  (2)  (1)
Note: This table shows the relationship between messages displayed on the LCD
and the estimated failure location. Locations marked with (1) have a higher
probability than locations marked with (2).
 281 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
2. Methods of Replacing the Modules
CAUTION When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed
wrist band and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise,
many of the electronic components could suffer damage.
CAUTION After replacing the SPM module, check all of the settings including the data
related the PLC and IEC103, etc. are restored the original settings.
The initial replacement procedure is as follows:
1). Switch off the DC power supply.
WARNING Hazardous voltage may remain in the DC circuit just after switching off the
DC power supply. It takes about 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
2). Remove the front panel cover.
3). Open the front panel.
Open the front panel of the relay by unscrewing the binding screw located on the left side of
the front panel.
Case size : 1/2”inchs
4). Detach the holding bar.

Detach the module holding bar by unscrewing the binding screw located on the left side of the
bar.
 282 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
5). Unplug the cables.

Unplug the ribbon cable running among the modules by nipping the catch (in case of black
connector) and by pushing the catch outside (in case of gray connector) on the connector.
Gray connector
Black connector
6). Pull out the module.

Pull out the failure module by pulling up or down the top and bottom levers (white).
SPM module
7). Insert the replacement module.

Insert the replacement module into the same slots where marked up.
.
8). Do the No.5 to No.1 steps in reverse order.
CAUTION Supply DC power after checking that all the modules are in their original
positions and the ribbon cables are plugged in. If the ribbon cables are not
plugged in enough (especially the gray connectors), the module could suffer
damage.
Details of the gray connector on modules (top side)
×Not enough ○Enough
 283 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
9). Lamp Test

 RESET key is pushed 1 second or more by LCD display off.
 It checks that all LCDs and LEDs light on.
10). Check the automatic supervision functions.

 LCD not display “Auto-supervision” screens in turn, and Event Records
 Checking the “IN SERVICE” LED light on and “ALARM LED” light off.
 284 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Appendix R
Ordering
 285 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Ordering
GRT100 C 0
Type:
Transformer protection Relay GRT100
Model:
-Model 100 series: 2 three-phase current inputs for
2-winding transformer
- 16 BIs, 13 BOs, 5 trip BOs 101
- 15 BIs (12-independent), 13 BOs, 3 trip BOs 103
-Model 200 series: 3 three-phase current inputs for
3-winding transformer
CT Rating:
1A, 50Hz, 110V/125Vdc 1
1A, 60Hz, 110V/125Vdc 2
5A, 50Hz, 110V/125Vdc 3
5A, 60Hz, 110V/125Vdc 4
1A, 50Hz, 220V/250Vdc 5
1A, 60Hz, 220V/250Vdc 6
5A, 50Hz, 220V/250Vdc 7
5A, 60Hz, 220V/250Vdc 8
1A, 50Hz, 48V/54V/60Vdc A
1A, 60Hz, 48V/54V/60Vdc B
5A, 50Hz, 48V/54V/60Vdc C
5A, 60Hz, 48V/54V/60Vdc D
1A, 50Hz, 24V/30Vdc E
1A, 60Hz, 24V/30Vdc F
5A, 50Hz, 24V/30Vdc G
5A, 60Hz, 24V/30Vdc H
Communications:
RS485 1
Fibre optic 2
Dual RS485 3
Dual Fibre optic 4
RS485 + fibre optic 9
Miscellaneous:
None 0
 286 
6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4
Version-up Records
Version Date Revised Section Contents

No.
0.0 Sep. 20, 2005 -- First issue
0.1 Dec. 12, 2006 Added Model 103.
2.3.1, 2.3.5 Modified the description.
2.4 Modified the description.
2.8 Modified the description of the ‘Setting’.
2.11.1, 2.11.3, 2.11.8 Modified the description.
Appendices Modified Appendix B, D, G, H, J, K and P.
0.2 Feb. 14, 2007 2.1, 2.2 Modified the description.
2.3.1 Modified the description of ‘Scheme logic’.
2.3.3 Modified the description.
2.3.5 Modified the description and the setting range table.
2.4, 2.5 Modified the description.
2.6, 2.7, 2.8 Modified the setting range table.
2.11.1, 2.11,2, 2.11.3, Modified the description.
2.11.6
3.4.1, 3.4.3 Modified the description.
4.4, 4.5 Modified the description and added Figure 4.4.2.
4.2.6.7 Added ‘CAUTION’ in ‘Setting the transformer parameters’.
6.7.2 Modified the description and Table 6.7.1.
Appendices Modified Appendix B, E, G and Q, and added Appendix P. Shifted the
‘Ordering’ to Appendix R.
0.3 Mar. 5, 2008 2.3.2 Modified the description and Figure 2.3.2.1.
2.10 Modified the description and Figure2.10.1.
4.2.4.3 Modified the description.
Modified the Appendix G, K, Q and R.
0.4 Nov. 12, 2010 Precautions Modify the description of ‘Disposal’.
2.3.5 Modified the description and Table numbers.
2.4 Modified Figure 2.4.3. (Added “ON” under the scheme switches.)
2.5 Modified Figures 2.5.1 and 2.5.2. (Added “ON” under the scheme switches.)
2.6 Modified the description and Figure 2.6.1. (Added “ON” under the scheme
Switches.)
2.10 Modified the description and Figure 2.10.1.(Added “ON” under the scheme
Switches.)
4.2.1, 4.2.6.3 Modified the description.
Appendices Modified Appendix K and N.
0.5 May 23, 2011 Appendix Modified Appendix B.
1.0 May 19, 2014 2.3.5 Modified the caution of kct setting
1.1 Oct. 2, 2017 --- Republished under spin-off company
 287 

GRT100C 6F2S0844-1.1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GRT100C 6F2S0844-1.1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GRT100C 6F2S0844-1.1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

6 F 2 S 0 8 4 4

TRANSFORMER PROTECTION RELAY

© Toshiba Energy Systems & Solutions Corporation 2017

Explanation of symbols used

DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or

WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in death or

3.3.2 Relay Monitoring and Testing 67

6.5.1 Measuring Element 122

Appendix A Block Diagram 149

Relay Type and Model

Further, the GRT100 provides the following functions.

2.2 Protection Scheme

Small Differential current Large

Figure 2.2.1 Measuring Elements of Model 100 series

Figure 2.2.2 Measuring Elements of Model 200 series

Figure 2.2.3 Measuring Elements of Model 200 series

2.3 Current Differential Protection

Figure 2.3.1.2 Scheme Logic of Current Differential Protection

Display mode following differential tripping

Table 2.3.1.1 Operating Phase / Faulted Phase Display

Operating phase display Faulted phase display

5F-C 100 2REF5

Figure 2.3.1.4 Operating Phase and Faulted Phase Selection Logic

2.3.2 Stability for CT Saturation during Through-fault Conditions

Figure 2.3.2.1 Differential Element with CT Saturation Countermeasure

The algorithm of this element is given by the following equation:

2.3.3 Matching of CT Secondary Currents

Matching of CT ratio Matching of CT ratio

Figure 2.3.3.1 Matching Method

2.3.3.1 Matching of Phase Angle

2.3.3.2 Zero-sequence current elimination

Figure 2.3.3.2 External Earth Fault at the Star-connected side of a Transformer

2.3.3.3 Matching of CT Ratio

= transformer capacity(kVA)/( 3  rated voltage(kV)) / CT ratio of 1CT

2.3.4 Connection between CT Secondary Circuit and the GRT100

Figure 2.3.4.1 Connection of CT Secondary Circuit and the GRT100

Element Range Step Default Remarks

p1 10  100% 1% 100% % slope of small current region

Setting of p1, p2 and kp

Setting for CT ratio matching

Calculation steps Primary Secondary Tertiary

kct1 kct3 kct2

Figure 2.3.5.1 CT Ratio Matching

Setting for phase angle matching

yd_p: Because the primary winding is star-connected, set 1.

Table 2.3.5.1 Phase Angle Matching Calculation

O’clock Calculation Remarks

8 Ia’ = (2Ib  Ia  Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (2Ic  Ia  Ib)/ 3 Ic’ = (2Ia  Ib  Ic)/ 3

Table 2.3.5.2 Setting for Phase Angle Matching

(b) Settings for typical connections of 3-windings transformer

Transformer connections described in Settings for phase angle correction Remarks

(Note) Dotted line: Reference phase

<How to set phase angle matching for GRT100>

Table 2.3.5.3 Transformer Connection and Current Vector

Auto-transformer (with internal delta-winding)

Table 2.3.5.4 Example of DIFT and REF Setting

One-and-a-half breaker system

2.4 Restricted Earth Fault Protection

Figure 2.4.1 Restricted Earth Fault Protection